1 - Huawei OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description PDF

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
V100R002C00
IDU Hardware Description
Issue 03
Date 2010-01-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 910 V100R002C00
iManager U2000 V100R001C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer
l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication
l Basics of the OptiX RTN 910
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

OptiX RTN 910
GUI Conventions IDU Hardware Description
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize

or supplement important points of the main
text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
Section Description
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card Modifies the sequence of high-order bits and
lower-order bits of DIP switches.
3.5.2 Functions and Features Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on

the IF1 board.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Update History
Section Description
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment Adds descriptions of requirements for the
diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable, types of
coaxial connectors, and crimp pliers.
- Fixes known bugs.

This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
Section Description
D Glossary Adds certain terms.
E Acronyms and Abbreviations Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.

This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CSTA...............................................................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-9
3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-9
3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-11
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-13
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-22
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-25
3.3.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-25
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-26
3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-26
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-33
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-37
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-50
3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-53
3.4.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-54
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

OptiX RTN 910
Contents IDU Hardware Description
3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-59
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-61
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-66
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-68
3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-70
3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-76
3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-78
3.6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-79
3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-80
3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-87
3.7.5 Valid Slot..............................................................................................................................................3-89
3.7.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-90
3.8 EM6T/EM6F.................................................................................................................................................3-91
3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-97
3.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-101
3.8.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-102
3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-102
3.8.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-102
3.9 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................3-104
3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-106
3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-109
3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-111
3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-111
3.9.7 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-112
3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-112
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
3.10 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-113
3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-114
3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-114
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-115
3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-117
3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-121
3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-122
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-122
3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-122
3.11 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-123
3.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-124
3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-125
3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-126
3.12 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-127
3.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-128
3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-129
3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-130
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment .....................................................................................................5-9
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-16
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

OptiX RTN 910
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs.............................................................A-10
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................A-14
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-16
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-17
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-17
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-19
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-20
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-22
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-23
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-24
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-25
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-27
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-28
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-30
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-31
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-32
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP......................................................................A-34
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................A-35
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-36
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-37
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-41
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-42
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting..........................................................A-43
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-44
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-45
A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-60
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-62
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-65
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79

A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-82
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-83
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-85
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-88
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-91
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-93
A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-96
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-97
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-99
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-102
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-105
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-106
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-107
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-109
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-110
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-113
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-114
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-115
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-121
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-126
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-126
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-132
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-144
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-144
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-145
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-147
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-153
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-155
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-155
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-161
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-163
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-171
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-174
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-175
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-176
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-176
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-178
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-178
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-180
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-185
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

OptiX RTN 910
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-187
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-188
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-188
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-189
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-190
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-191
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-192
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-193
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-194
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-196
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-199
A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-200
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-201
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-206
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-211
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-213
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-218
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-223
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-232
A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-233
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-234
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-235
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-236
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-237
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-239
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-239
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-241
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-242
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-242
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-243
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-246
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-247
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-249
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-251
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-253
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-254
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-255
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-256
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-261
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-262
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-263
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265

A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-266
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-268
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-271
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-272
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-276
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-278
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-279
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-281
A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-283
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-284
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-284
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-286
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1
D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1
E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910........................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910......................................1-3
Figure 1-3 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-4
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-12
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA..................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface............................3-17
Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-25
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-34
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-36
Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-18 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-42
Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface..........................3-43
Figure 3-20 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-48
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-51
Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-53
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-53
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-53
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-54
Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-62
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

OptiX RTN 910
Figures IDU Hardware Description
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-66

Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-73
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-76
Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-78
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-79
Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-87
Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-89
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-90
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram...............................................................................................................3-95
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T................................................................................................................3-97
Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F................................................................................................................ 3-97
Figure 3-41 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-99
Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-101
Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F..............................................................3-101
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-107
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-109
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-111
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D..........................................................................3-111
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-115
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-51 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119
Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis.........................................................................3-121
Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910.............................................................................3-121
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-124
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-125
Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-128
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-129
Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-130
Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-130
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7
Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Figures
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-13
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17
Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................1-4
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910..........................................................................1-5
Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of IDUs..........................................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................3-14
Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.................................................. 3-15
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-16
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-17
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface........................................................................................3-18
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface..................................................................................3-19
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-19
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA..........................................................................3-20
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-23
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-26
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-27
Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-27
Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-28
Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-28
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-29
Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-29
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-29
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB..........................................................................3-38
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC......................................................................................3-39
Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces................................................ 3-41
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface.................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface............................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3-28 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-43
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

OptiX RTN 910
Tables IDU Hardware Description
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-44

Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-45
Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-45
Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-45
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB..............................................................3-46
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC..........................................................................3-46
Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-47
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-47
Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-48
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches..................................................................................................................3-51
Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC..............................................................................3-54
Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-55
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-55
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-56
Table 3-43 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-56
Table 3-44 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-57
Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-57
Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-57
Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-58
Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-58
Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-58
Table 3-50 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-59
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-62
Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-65
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-66
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-67
Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-69
Table 3-56 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-69
Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-70
Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-70
Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-73
Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-75
Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-76
Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-78
Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-84
Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-86
Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-87
Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces............................................................................................................3-89
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description Tables

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction............................................................................... 3-95
Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction..............................................................................3-96
Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................... 3-97
Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F...........................................................................3-99
Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-99
Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-100
Table 3-81 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..............................................................3-101
Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-101
Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-102
Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-102
Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-104
Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D.........................................................3-107
Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.......................................................3-108
Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.....................................................................................3-109
Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces .........................................................................................................3-110
Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D..........................................................................................................3-111
Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D.....................................................................................................3-112
Table 3-94 STM-1 optical interface performance............................................................................................3-112
Table 3-95 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-113
Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................3-115
Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D.............................................3-116
Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................3-118
Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S.......................................................................................3-118
Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D...................................................................................3-118
Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119
Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-121
Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-122
Table 3-104 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-122
Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-123
Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators ..................................................................................3-125
Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................3-126
Table 3-108 Technical specifications...............................................................................................................3-127
Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-129
Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators........................................................................................3-130
Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-131
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

OptiX RTN 910
Tables IDU Hardware Description
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3

Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-10
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14
Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors..........5-15
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface.................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...................................................................................5-19
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.............................................................................................5-19
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-275
Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-280
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................C-1
Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB............................................................................C-2
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC........................................................................................C-3
Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-6
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-7
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-9
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-9
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX........................................................................................C-10
Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................C-10
Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................C-11
Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-11
xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 910 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission
system.
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different
control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different
microwave application scenarios.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

OptiX RTN 910
1 Introduction IDU Hardware Description
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the
OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The users can choose an appropriate
type based on the actual requirements.
The OptiX RTN 910 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation and
flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,
Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the
smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid
microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes that
occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmission
requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybrid
microwave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 910 for the
mobile communication network.
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
E1
E1 E1
E1
E1 STM-1/E1 Regional Backhaul E1

Network
E1
E1
E1 E1
OptiX RTN 910 BTS BSC
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
E1
FE E1
FE
E1
STM-1/ E1
E1
Regional backhaul
E1 network
FE/GE
GE
E1
FE
FE E1
OptiX RTN 910 NodeB BTS RNC BSC
NOTE
l In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNC
or the BSC directly.
l When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NE
cascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performs
multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and
communication function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910
Item Performance
Chassis height 1U
Pluggable Supported
Number of microwave 1-2

directions

OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance
RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration

2+0 non-protection configuration
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N = 1)
XPIC configuration
Figure 1-3 IDU 910
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and
amplification of signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 series products can uses the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item Description
Standard Power High Power ODU Low Capacity for

ODU PDH ODU
ODU type SP, SPA HP LP
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 7/8/11/13/15/18/23

26/38 GHz (SP 26/32/38 GHz GHz
ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)

OptiX RTN 910
Item Description
Standard Power High Power ODU Low Capacity for

ODU PDH ODU
Microwave QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

modulation mode 32QAM/64QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM 128QAM/256QAM
(SP)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM (SPA)
Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item Description
High Power ODU
ODU type XMC-2
Frequency band 15/23 GHz
Microwave modulation mode QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/

256QAM
Channel spacing 7/14/28/56 MHz
Antenna
The OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-
polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the
corresponding feeder system.
There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-
polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the
ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mounting
method.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting
l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter

and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting
1.3 Configuration Modes

The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different
control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different
microwave application scenarios.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910

Configuration Type of the Type of the IF Type of the Main
Modes Control, Board ODU Application
Switching,
and Timing
Board
PDH CSTA IF1 Low capacity Providing a

microwave for PDH ODU radio link whose
equipment capacity is not
higher than
16xE1
SDH CSTA IF1 Standard power Providing an

microwave ODU or high STM-1 radio
equipment power ODU link or a high-
capacity PDH
radio link
Hybrid CSHA/CSHB/ IFU2 Standard power Providing a

microwave CSHC ODU or high Hybrid radio
equipment power ODU link
XPIC Hybrid CSHA/CSHB/ IFX2 Standard power Providing a

microwave CSHC ODU or high Hybrid radio
equipment power ODU link of the super
capacity

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU of OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It supports various installation modes and therefore
can be deployed flexibly.
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The
IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.
2.3 IDU Labels
There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 910
2 Chassis IDU Hardware Description
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The
IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.
The IDU 910 can be installed:
l In a 300 mm ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In an open rack
l On a wall
l On a table
2.3 IDU Labels

There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU
chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and
boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description
ESD protection Indicates that the

label equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the

grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning warns you not to

label touch the fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High The board surface

temperature temperature may
warning label exceed 70°C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55°C. In
this case, you need
to wear protective
gloves before
handling the board.
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification Indicates that the
card label equipment is
HUAWEI
qualified.
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label Indicates that the

equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.

OptiX RTN 910
2 Chassis IDU Hardware Description
Label Label Name Description
Product Indicates the

nameplate label product name and
certification.
Operation The switch lever

guidance label must be pulled
outwards slightly
PULL before setting the
switch to the "I" or
"O" position.
Label Position
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels

Class 1 Laser Product
OptiX RTN 910
电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48－-60V;5A
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
This device complies with Part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
N 14036
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MA DE IN CHINA
华为技术有限公司中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO ., LTD. MADE IN CHINA
! WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
3 Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
board, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board.
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)
x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect
unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width).
3.2 Board List
The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,
switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with
regard to the types and number of service interfaces.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference
from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution
modes.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 EM6T/EM6F

OptiX RTN 910
3 Boards IDU Hardware Description
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and
two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.

OptiX RTN 910
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)
x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect
unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width).
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 910 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)
The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has two
ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted or
removed. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attached
to one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2.
Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01
① ② ③ ④
① Internal code
② Board version
③ Board name
④ Board feature code

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
The indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interface
board indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface board
indicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. For details about the board feature code, see the
description of each board in this document.
3.2 Board List

The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot Slot Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

5 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
NOTE
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.
Table 3-1 List of IDUs

Board Full
Name Spelling Valid Slot Description
CSTA TDM Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connections

control, for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent
switching, to 8x8 VC-4s.
and timing l Performs system communication and
board control.
l Provides the clock processing function and
supports one external clock input/output
function.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two
STM-1 optical interfaces.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one
NM serial interface, and one NE cascading
interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface, one
asynchronous data interface, and three-
input and one-output external alarm
interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910
Board Full
CSHA Hybrid Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connections

and timing l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching
board capability.
l Performs system communication and
control.
function.
interfaces.
l Provides two FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
are compatible with the FE electrical
interface.
interface.
interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910
Board Full
CSHB Hybrid Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connections

board capability.
control.
function.
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm
E1 interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
are compatible with the FE electrical
interface.
interface.
interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910
Board Full
CSHC Hybrid Slot 1 l Provides full timeslot cross-connections

board capability.
control.
function.
interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two
STM-1 optical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with
the FE electrical interfaces.
interface.
interfaces.
IF1 SDH IF Slot 3 or slot l Provides one IF interface.

board 4 l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave
solution and the STM-1-based SDH
microwave solution.
IFU2 Universal IF Slot 3 or slot l Provides one IF interface.

board 4 l Supports the Hybrid microwave solution.
l Supports AM.
IFX2 Universal Slot 3 or slot l Provides one IF interface.

XPIC IF 4 l Supports the XPIC function of the Hybrid
board microwave.
l Supports the AM of the Hybrid
microwave.
SL1D 2xSTM-1 Slot 3 or slot Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
interface 4 optical interfaces.
board

OptiX RTN 910
Board Full
EM6T 6 Port RJ45 Slot 3 or slot l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

Ethernet/ 4 l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
Gigabit are compatible with the FE electrical
Ethernet interface.
Interface
Board
EM6F 4 Port RJ45 + l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

2 Port SFP l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
Fast optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
Ethernet/ electrical interfaces are compatible with
Gigabit the FE electrical interfaces.
Ethernet
Interface
Board
SP3S 16xE1 Slot 3 or slot Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

tributary 4 interfaces.
board
SP3D 32xE1 Slot 3 or slot Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

tributary 4 interfaces.
board
TNC1PIU Power board Slot 5 Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
TNC1FAN Fan board Slot 6 Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,
auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons,
and labels on the front panel.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.

OptiX RTN 910
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also
allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit
on the CSTA.
3.3.7 Board Feature Code
The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar
code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
3.3.9 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH
optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,
auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
Time Division Cross-Connection

l Grooms service signals between boards.
l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication

l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
l Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and processes a maximum of seven DCCs.
l Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.

OptiX RTN 910
l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave
interface line clock, or tributary clock.
l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
l Supports the detection of the states of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
l Supports the locked, holdover, and free-run modes.
Service Interfaces
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 service interfaces.
l Adopts the SFP optical modules and can provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.
Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

l Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
l Provides one NM serial interface.
l Provides one NE cascade interface.
l Provides one Orderwire interface.
l Provides one asynchronous data interface.
l Provides one synchronous data interface.
l Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
Protection Processing
l Performs the 1+1 protection switching.
l Performs the linear MSP switching.
l Performs the SNCP switching.
l Performs the clock protection switching.
Alarms and Performance Events

l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.
l Supports the outloop in VC-4 paths.
l Supports the board reset.

OptiX RTN 910
l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the

-48 V power supply.
l Checks the indicators on all the boards.
l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The
backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an on-
site board replacement.

The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA

Backplane
STM-1 VC-4
signal signal
SDH signal processing
VC-4 signal
unit VC-4 Cross-connect TDM service board
E1 signal signal unit
E1 signal processing
unit
Control bus
NM interface
Clock signal
NM serial interface
received from
System control other boards
NE cascade Clock unit
and Clock signal
interface communicatio provided to other
Asynchronous n unit boards
Auxiliary interface
data interface
Synchronous
data interface
unit
Clock source Clock signal

External alarm received from provided to the
interface the service unit other units on
on the board the board
Orderwire
interface
External clock signal
Clock interface
Supplies power to Power -48 V1
the other units on supply -48 V2
the board unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power
supplied to the fans

OptiX RTN 910
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l Controls and manages the other units on the CSTA, and also collects alarms and
performance events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM on the IF board.
l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
– Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.
– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-
connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM Sink TDM

service unit service unit
HOXC
LOXC

OptiX RTN 910
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-
connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock
signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes
pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides
the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on
the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,
asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel


OptiX RTN 910
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA
CSTA
1 2
PROG
SYNC
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
STM-1
SRV
E1
CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE 1~16
1 2 3 4 5
1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Auxiliary interfaces and

management interfaces
4. STM-1 optical interfaces 5. E1 (1-16) interface
Indicators
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and When the board is being powered on or
off for 100 ms repeatedly being reset, the software is being loaded
to the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and When the board is being powered on or

off for 300 ms repeatedly being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being

initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off When the board is being powered on or
for 100 ms repeatedly being reset, the BOOTROM self-check
fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered or

being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.

OptiX RTN 910
Off The software is running normally.
SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.
On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on the

board.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface on the line

reports the R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical interface on the line does

not report the R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface on the line

Off The second optical interface on the line

does not report the R_LOS alarm.
Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces

Interface Description Connector Type
NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface
EXT NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or

2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface RJ-45
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface
ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface
PHONE Orderwire interface
CF RCV CF configuration reset button -
RST Board warm reset button -

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can
transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service
overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock
interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
87654321
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface
Interface Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)
4 Grounding end of the NM serial

interface
NMS/COM
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receiving data (-)
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial

interface
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface
EXT 2 Transmitting data (-)

OptiX RTN 910
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector

LINK (green) On The link is normal.
Off The link fails.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting or

receiving data.
Off The interface is not transmitting or

receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
CSTA
PROG
SYNC
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
CRIT
SRV
MAJ
MAJ
MIN
E1
LAN
CSTA
PROG
SYNC
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
CRIT
SRV
MAJ
MAJ
MIN
E1
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided
in Table 3-7.

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin Working Mode
Externa External External Time External External Time

l Clock Time Input Output Time Input Output
(1 PPS + (1 PPS + Time (DCLS) (DCLS)
Time Information)
Informatio
n)
1 CLK Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

receivin
g (-)

receivin
g (+)
3 Not 1 PPS signal 1 PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time

defined input (-) output (-) signal input (-) signal output (-)
(RS-422 (RS-422 level) (RS-422 level) (RS-422 level)
level)
4 CLK Grounding Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

transmit end
ting (-)

transmit end
ting (+)

defined input (+) output (+) signal input (+) signal output (+)
level)
7 Not Time Time Not defined Not defined

defined information information
input (-) output (-)
(RS-422 (RS-422 level)
level)

input (+) output (+)
level)

OptiX RTN 910
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface
ALMI/ 1 The first external alarm input signal

ALMO
2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
7 The first external alarm output signal (+)
8 The first external alarm output signal (-)
The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
PHONE 1 Not defined

OptiX RTN 910
4 RING
5 TIP
6 Not defined
Service Interfaces
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA
TX1 Transmit port of the first LC (the SFP optical module)

STM-1 optical interface
RX1 Receive port of the first

TX2 Transmit port of the second LC (the SFP optical module)

RX2 Receive port of the second

E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 Anea 96

signals
The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96
interface is provided in Figure 3-9 and Table 3-12.
Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

POS.1
POS.96

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

differential signal (-) signal (-)
3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1 differential


5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential


7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential


9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential


11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential


13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)
15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential


17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential



OptiX RTN 910
19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential


21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1


23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1


49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1


51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1


53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1


55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1



The CF card stores the following information:

l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
l NE software and all the board software programs
l All the FPGA files
l License file for microwave link capability

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

2
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1
1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches
Setting the DIP Switchesa Function
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
0 0 0 1 Reserved.
0 0 1 0 Memory self-
check state.
0 0 1 1 Commissioning
state.
0 1 0 0 Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.

OptiX RTN 910
1 2 3 4
0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover
state.
0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition
state.
0 1 1 1 Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 1 To recover the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 To erase the data

in the system
parameter area.
1 0 1 1 To erase the
databases.
1 1 0 0 To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
1 1 1 0 To format the
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.

OptiX RTN 910
1 2 3 4
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is
turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also
allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit
on the CSTA.
Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 (CSTA)
According to the functional units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and
communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary and management board (AUX), and logical
service boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 (CSTA) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar
code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA
Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH
optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the primary performance.
Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber

OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance
Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
transmission direction
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each One symmetrical wire pair


OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance
Impedance (ohm) 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance
External synchronization 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
source (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and

holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
Impedance (ohm) 120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm

(width)
Weight 1.08 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 13.6W

OptiX RTN 910
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,
switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with
regard to the types and number of service interfaces.

The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-
connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and
management interfaces.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3.4.4 Front Panel
3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical
boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS
so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature
code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board
name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-
connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,
E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-
connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the

OptiX RTN 910
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and

management interfaces.
Packet Switching
l Supports the E-Line and E-LAN services.
l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN tags and
forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
l Supports the MAC address learning function.
l Supports the MSTP protocol that adopts only the common and internal spanning tree
(CIST).
l Supports the IGMP Snooping protocol.
l Supports the QoS function.
l Supports the ITU-T G.8032-compliant ERPS Ethernet ring protection.
l Supports the disabling of the Ethernet interface connecting to the user equipment when a
fault occurs on the transmission network.
l Supports two aggregation modes (namely, manual aggregation and static aggregation) and
two load sharing types (namely, sharing and non-sharing). The load sharing algorithm is
based on the hash algorithm of the MAC address or the IP address.
l Supports the Ethernet OAM functions that are compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet that is compliant with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.
8262.
Time Division Cross-Connection

l Grooms service signals between boards.
l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication

l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
l Realizes the communication with the NMS and other NEs. The CSHC can process a
maximum of seven DCCs. The CSHA and CSHB can provide up to 5 DCC channels.
l Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.

OptiX RTN 910
l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave
interface line clock, Ethernet interface line clock, or tributary clock.
l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
l Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.
TDM Service Processing Interfaces

l The CSHA provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.
l The CSHB provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.
l The CSHC supports sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces and two STM-1 optical
interfaces. The two STM-1 optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
Ethernet Service Interfaces

l The CSHA provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two
GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.
l The CSHB provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two
GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.
l The CSHC provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE optical interfaces. The two
GE optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
l The Ethernet interfaces support the auto-negotiation and self-loop diagnosis functions.
l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The tag attributes of an
Ethernet interface can be set only when the network attributes of the Ethernet interface is
set to UNI.
l Supports the IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow control function.

l Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
l Provides one NM serial interface.
l Provides one NE cascade interface.
l Provides one Orderwire interface.
l Provides one asynchronous data interface.
l Provides one synchronous data interface.
l Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
l Performs the 1+1 protection switching.
l Performs the linear MSP switching.
l Performs the SNCP switching.
l Performs the clock protection switching.

OptiX RTN 910

setting the alarm thresholds.
l Supports RMON performance events.
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
l Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.
l Supports the board reset.
l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the
-48 V power supply.
l Checks the indicators on all the boards.
l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The
backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an on-
site board replacement.

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
NOTE
This topic considers the CSHC as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram

Backplane
FE signal
FE signal
FE signal
access unit
GE bus
Packet Ethernet service
GE signal switching unit board
GE signal
GE signal access unit
STM-1
VC-4
signal signal
processing VC-4 signal
unit VC-4 Cross-connect
TDM service board
E1 signal signal unit
E1 signal processing
unit
Control bus
NM interface
NM serial interface
Clock signal received
NE cascade System control from other boards
and Clock unit
interface
Asynchronous data
communication Clock signal provided
Auxiliary interface
interface unit to the other boards

Synchronous data
interface
unit
External alarm
interface Clock signal Clock signal
received from provided to
Orderwire the service unit the other units
interface on the board on the board
Clock External clock signal

interface
Power supplied to Power -48 V1
the other units on supply -48 V2
the board unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to the fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance
l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.

OptiX RTN 910
l The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, through
the control bus.
l The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit,
through the control bus.
l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
– Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.
– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
Packet Switching Unit

The main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer
2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.
l After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from
other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from other
Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system
control and communication unit for processing. The system control and communication
unit processes the protocol packets and then sends the protocol packets back to the packet
switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet
interface unit on the board or to the other Ethernet boards.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-
connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-14 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM Sink TDM

service unit service unit
HOXC
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-
connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
FE Signal Access Unit

The FE signal access unit provides access to two FE signals and works with the Layer 2 switching
unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l In the receive direction, after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for the FE signals, the FE signal access unit extracts framed FE signals by
delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernet
performance statistics.
l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the
CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the FE signal access
unit performs the parallel/serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the
FE signals to the FE interface.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit provides access to two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals
and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l In the receive direction, after performing the O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for the GE optical signals or after performing restructuring,
decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE electrical signals, the GE signal access
unit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and
performs the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics.

OptiX RTN 910
l In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the
CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the GE signal access
unit performs the parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits the GE signals
to the GE interface after performing O/E conversion.
E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock
signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes
pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides
the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on
the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,
asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA

CSHA
SYNC
STAT
PROG
SRV
E1
CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2 1~16
1 2 3 4 5 6

OptiX RTN 910

4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-16) interface
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB

CSHB
SYNC
PROG
STAT
SRV
E1 E1
CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2 1~16 17~32
1 2 3 4 5 6

4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. E1 (1-32) interface
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC

CSHC
1 2 1 2 E1
E1(1~16)
1~16
PROG
LINK1
LINK2
SYNC
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
GE1 GE2 STM-1

STAT
SRV
CF RCV RST RSTNMS/COM

CF RCV NMS/COM EXT
NE CLK/TIME
CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 GEETH STM-1
STM-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4. FE service interfaces 5. GE service interfaces 6. STM-1 optical interfaces
7. E1 (1-16) interface
Indicators
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB

OptiX RTN 910

board.

BIOS boot state.

initialized.
fails.


board.

system.
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC


OptiX RTN 910

board.

BIOS boot state.

initialized.
fails.


board.

system.
LINK1 On (green) The port connection is normal.
Off The port connection is interrupted.
ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) The data is being transmitted or received.
Off No data is being transmitted or received.

OptiX RTN 910




Description of the Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces
Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces

NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface
EXT NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or

2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface RJ-45
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface
ALMI/ALMO Alarm input/output interface
PHONE Orderwire interface
CF RCV CF configuration reset button -
RST Board warm reset button -
NOTE
l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can
transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service
overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock
interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-18 shows the front view of the RJ-45
connector.

OptiX RTN 910
87654321
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface
4 Grounding end of the NM serial

interface
NMS/COM
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial

interface
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface
EXT 3 Receiving data (+)
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-28.

OptiX RTN 910

Off The link fails.

receiving data.

receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-19 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
CSHA
SYNC
STAT
PROG
SRV
E1
LAN
CSHA
SYNC
STAT
PROG
SRV
E1
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided
in Table 3-29.
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin Working Mode
Externa External External Time External External Time

l Clock Time Input Output Time Input Output
(1 PPS + (1 PPS + Time (DCLS) (DCLS)
Time Information)
Informatio
n)

receivin
g (-)

receivin
g (+)

defined input (-) output (-) signal input (-) signal output (-)
level)

transmit end
ting (-)

transmit end
ting (+)

defined input (+) output (+) signal input (+) signal output (+)
level)

input (-) output (-)
level)

input (+) output (+)
level)
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-30.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface

F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-31.
Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface

ALMI/ 1 The first external alarm input signal

ALMO
2 Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
7 The first external alarm output signal (+)
8 The first external alarm output signal (-)
The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-32.
Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface

PHONE 1 Not defined
4 RING

OptiX RTN 910
5 TIP
6 Not defined
Service Interfaces
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB

FE1 FE interface
FE2
RJ-45
GE1 GE electrical interface
GE2
E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signal Anea 96

interfaces
E1 (17-32) The seventeenth to thirty-second

E1 signal interfaces a
NOTE
a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal interfaces. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal interfaces.
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC

FE1 FE interface RJ-45
FE2
GE1 GE optical interface LC (the SFP optical module)
GE2
TX1 Transmit port of the first STM-1 LC (the SFP optical module)
optical interface
RX1 Receive port of the first STM-1

optical interface
TX2 Transmit port of the second STM-1 LC (the SFP optical module)
optical interface

OptiX RTN 910
RX2 Receive port of the second STM-1

optical interface
E1 (1-16) The first to sixteenth E1 signals Anea 96
The FE interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-negotiation
modes. For the pin assignment information, see Table 3-35 and Table 3-36.
Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode


(+)

(-)

OptiX RTN 910

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. The meanings of the two indicators are the same as the
meanings of the indicators on the NMS/COM interface (RJ-45 connector).
The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96
interface is provided in Figure 3-20 and Table 3-37.

POS.1
POS.96





OptiX RTN 910




















OptiX RTN 910











The CF card stores the following information:
l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
l NE software and all the board software programs
l All the FPGA files
l License file for microwave link capability

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

2
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1
1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
0 0 0 1 Reserved.
0 0 1 0 Memory self-
check state.
0 0 1 1 Commissioning
state.
0 1 0 0 Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.

OptiX RTN 910
1 2 3 4
0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover
state.
0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition
state.
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 1 To recover the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 To erase the data

in the system
parameter area.
databases.
1 1 0 0 To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.

OptiX RTN 910
1 2 3 4
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is
turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.4.6 Valid Slots

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical
boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS
so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
Different logical boards are allocated for the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC on the NMS.
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 ( CSHA ) Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3S)
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 (CSHB ) Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3D)

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 ( CSHC ) Slot 10 ( AUX ) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature
name.
Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
A 120
B 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Related References

This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-
connection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,
E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching
Supports the 4.2Gbit/s packet switching function.

OptiX RTN 910
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
Ethernet Interface Performance

The Ethernet interface performance meets the relevant standards specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following three tables provide the performance indexes of the GE optical interfaces, GE electrical
interfaces, and FE electrical interfaces, respectively.
Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical Single-mode optical

fiber fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ-45

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance

Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)



Item Performance

(km)
(nm)

(dBm)

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
NOTE

OptiX RTN 910

Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

OptiX RTN 910
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance
External synchronization 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
source (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and

holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
Impedance (ohm) 120

OptiX RTN 910
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance

(width)
Weight CSHA: 1.11 kg

CSHB: 1.16 kg
CSHC: 1.13 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W
Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W
Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference
from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution
modes.

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

OptiX RTN 910

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l Maps SDH and PDH service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.
l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave frame signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 overhead bytes in the SDH microwave
signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode.
In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values
are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the
overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the pass-
through mode.
Pointer Processing
l Processes the AU pointers in the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the TU pointers in the PDH microwave signals.
l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.
l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels
in an SNCP group.
l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, and SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission
System Feature Description.

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE
l Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.
l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
l Supports the detection of the board temperature.
l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit
but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system
control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is
reloaded), and a service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1

Backplane
ODU control signal

SMODEM System control and
unit HSM switching signal communication unit
Paired board
Logic processing unit

Service
MUX/DEMUX unit
processing bus
Cross-connect unit
Combiner
interface
IF Microwave MODEM
unit
unit
Overhead
IF
frame signal unit
bus System control and
communication unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied -48 V

to the ODU Power
+3.3 V power supplied to supply +3.3
other modules on the unit V
+3.3 power supplied
board
to the monitoring
circuit
Clock signal provided Clock
to the other units on unit System clock signal
the board
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave
unit service signal from the IF signal.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interface
of the CPU unit in the system control and
communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the
automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters the signal.
l Performs A/D conversion.

OptiX RTN 910
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates the
corresponding alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and
(for SDH microwave R_LOF alarms.
signal processing) l Performs descrambling.
l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the
microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and
K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2
Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the
corresponding performance events.
l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates
the corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4
signal to the logic processing unit.

OptiX RTN 910
MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the PDH microwave frame header and

(for PDH microwave generates the corresponding alarms and performance
signal processing) events.
l Verifies the check code and generates the
l Detects the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
bus.
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes
from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
l Adjusts the TU pointers.
l Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals into
the specified position in the VC-4.
6 Logic processing l Processes the clock signal.

unit l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8
overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the cross-connect unit.
NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for
subsequent processing.

OptiX RTN 910
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1

unit l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2
Mbit/s overhead signals.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets the higher order path overheads.

(for SDH microwave l Sets the AU pointer.
signal processing)
l Sets the multiplex section overheads.
l Sets the regenerator section overheads.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.

(for PDH microwave l Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads.
signal processing)
3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.
4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted

from the system control and communication unit.
6 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service

unit signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also
reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply unit

l Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 V
power to the ODU.

OptiX RTN 910
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.5.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1

ODU-PWR
IF1
IF1
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
ODU
LINK
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1
STAT On (green) The board is working

normally.

l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or

major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.
Off The services are not

configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.

OptiX RTN 910
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) l The logical board is not

added on the NMS
l The ODU has critical or
major alarms.
l No power is supplied.
On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) and The antennas are not aligned.

off for 300 ms repeatedly
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the

opposite end reports an RDI.
Off The equipment at the

opposite end does not report
an RDI.
ACT On (green) l The board is in the active

state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is already
activated in the
unprotected system.
Off l The board is in the standby

system.
l The board is not activated
in the unprotected system.
Interfaces
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces

Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding
Cable
IF IF interface TNC IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protective
gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before
removing the IF cable.
The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before
setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus
20.
Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 10 Slot 1 SLOT 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-55 Slot allocation

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 3 > slot 4

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-56 IF performance

Item Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF 350

board (MHz)
Receive frequency of the IF 140

board (MHz)
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF 5.5

board (MHz)

board (MHz)

OptiX RTN 910
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance

(width)
Weight 0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power
distribution mode.
NOTE
In this version, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.6.4 Front Panel

OptiX RTN 910
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be
the same as the physical slots.
3.6.6 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames, and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Provides a maximum of 56 MHz signal bandwidth and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
Feature Description.

OptiX RTN 910

NOTE
l Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.
l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
l Supports the detection of the board voltage.
l Supports the detection of the board clock.
NOTE
Guide.

the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2

Backplane
ODU control signal
unit communication unit
HSM switching signal
Paired board
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
processi
ng unit
Overhead
MUX/DEMUX unit
Logic
processing bus System control and
Combiner
interface
IF MODEM communication unit

unit
unit
Microwave frame
IF
signal unit
Ethernet GE bus
processin Packet switching unit
g unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V1

supply
+3.3 V power supplied to unit -48V2
the other units on the board
+3.3
+3.3 V power supplied to V
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the Clock
unit System clock signal
other units on the board
Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step Functional Processing Flow
Module

l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control
and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Filters the signal.

l Performs the ADC sampling.
l Performs A/D conversion.

OptiX RTN 910

Module
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and

events.
alarms.
bus.
SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
processing unit.
l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service
signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid
microwave service signals to the ethernet processing
unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.

bandwidth.
signal to the cross-connect unitthe main and standby
cross-connect units.

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2

Module

2 Ethernet processing l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
unit l Processes the GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Amplifies the signals.




OptiX RTN 910
Power Supply Unit

l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to
the other units on the IFU2.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2

ODU-PWR
IFU2
WARNING
IF -48V OUTPUT
STAT
I O
ODU
LINK
RMT
ACT
SRV
TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE PULL
Indicators
Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2


normally.

to the board.

service.

OptiX RTN 910


configured.

added on the NMS
major alarms.



an RDI.

system.
activated in the
unprotected system.

system.

OptiX RTN 910
Interface and Switch
Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces

Cable
NOTE
is not required.
Labels
3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be
Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1
20.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2
Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 10 Slot 1 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9
Item Description

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
IF Performance
Item Performance
IF signal

board (MHz)

OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance

board (MHz)
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK

board (MHz)

board (MHz)
Item Performance
Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.79 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption : < 23 W
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
In this version, the IFX2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-
polarization interference in the IF signal.
the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
3.7.5 Valid Slot
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-
polarization interference in the IF signal.
IF Processing
l Supports the XPIC function, provides the XPIC input and output interfaces, and supports
the manual configuration of the XPIC function.
l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.

OptiX RTN 910
l Provides the maximum signal bandwidth of 56 MHz and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

NOTE
l Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.
l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
l Supports the detection of the board voltage.
l Supports the detection of the board clock.

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
Guide.

the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2

Backplane
ODU control signal
HSM switching
signal Paired
board
Service bus
Overhead
Cross - connect unit
processi
ng unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Logic
bus
processing
Combiner
interface
IF Microwave MODEM System control and

unit
unit
frame signal
IF

Ethernet GE
processing bus Packet switching unit
unit
XPIC signal
Control
bus System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
- 48 V power supplied to the ODU Power - 48 V1

supply
+3.3V power supplied to the
unit - 48 V2
+3.3V power supplied to +3.3 V
the monitoring circuit
other units on the board unit System clock signal

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2
Module

l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control
and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Performs the ADC sampling.

l Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.
– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and
transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.
l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the
paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to the
MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF

signal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal.

OptiX RTN 910

Module
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and

events.
alarms.
bus.
SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
processing unit.
l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service
signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid
microwave service signals to the Ethernet processing
unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.

bandwidth.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Module

2 Ethernet processing l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
unit l Processes the GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.

l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Amplifies the signals.




OptiX RTN 910
Power Supply Unit

the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to
the other units on the IFX2.
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2

ODU-PWR
IFX2
IFX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
PULL X-IN X-OUT
Indicators
Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

normally.

to the board.

OptiX RTN 910

service.


configured.

added on the NMS
major alarms.



an RDI.

system.
activated in the
unprotected system.

system.

OptiX RTN 910
Interfaces
Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces

Cable
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

interface
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

interface
NOTE
is not required.
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slot

The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be
Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1

OptiX RTN 910
20.
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)

Item Description

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Related References

This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF Performance
Item Performance
IF signal

OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance

board (MHz)

board (MHz)
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK

board (MHz)

board (MHz)

Item Performance
Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
Weight 0.80 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and
two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as

OptiX RTN 910
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
Ethernet Service Signal Processing

l The EM6T provides two GE electrical interfaces whereas the EM6F uses the SFP optical
modules to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the setting and query of the working modes of the Ethernet interfaces. The
supported working modes are as follows:
– The FE interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M
half duplex, and auto-negotiation.
– The GE electrical interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full
duplex, 100M half duplex, 1000M full duplex, and auto-negotiation.

OptiX RTN 910
– The GE optical interfaces support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/802.1p-compliant VLAN
tags, and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length
ranging from 1518 to 9600 bytes.
l Supports Jumbo frames with the maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.
l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
l Supports the link state pass through (LPT) function.
l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.
l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
NOTE
For details on LAG and Link State Pass Through, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following functions when working with the packet
switching board:
l Supports port-based, port+VLAN-based, and port+QinQ E-Line services.
l Supports 802.1d bridge-based, 802.1q bridge-based, and 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN
services.
QoS Service Processing

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following QoS functions when working with the
packet switching board:
l Supports flow classification over Ethernet interfaces based on the port, C-VLAN ID, S-
VLAN ID, priority of the 802.1p packets with C-VLAN or S-VLAN tags, or DSCP in the
IPv6 packets.
l Supports CAR flow monitoring.
l Supports queue scheduling.
– Each Ethernet interface supports scheduling of eight levels of priority queues.
– Supports the setting of the queue scheduling mode of each Ethernet interface to SP, SP
+WRR, or WRR.
l Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, priority queue, or traffic flow.
Ethernet OAM Processing

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following Ethernet OAM functions when working
with the packet switching board:
l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:
– Management of OAM maintenance points
– Continuity check test

OptiX RTN 910
– Loopback test
– Link trace test
l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:
– OAM automatic discovery
– Link performance monitoring
– Fault detection
– Loopback at the remote end
– Self-loop detection and self-loop port blocking
Clock Processing
l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
l Supports receiving and transmitting SSM messages through Ethernet interfaces.

setting the alarm thresholds.
l Supports RMON performance events.
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
l Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet ports.
l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet ports.
l Supports the mirroring function over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the query of the manufacturing information about the SFP module.

This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram

Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal Ethernet Ethernet
access unit
Ethernet signal Logic signal
processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit
FE signal Control signal
access unit
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Logic Control bus

System control and
control unit communication unit
Power -48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied to supply unit
the board -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power +3.3 V

supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction

1 GE signal access unit l Provides access to GE signal.

l Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for the GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC
code processing, and Ethernet performance count for
the frame signals.

OptiX RTN 910
2 Ethernet processing l Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to the
unit Ethernet data frames.
l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and CAR traffic monitoring, for the
Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logic
processing unit.
3 Logic processing Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the packet

unit switching unit.
Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction
1 Logic processing unit l Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
2 Ethernet processing l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
unit l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shaping
and queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the
corresponding egress ports based on the egress tags
contained in the Ethernet data frames.
3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

code computing, and Ethernet performance count.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/
GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit through
the control unit on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit through
the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control
and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control

OptiX RTN 910
unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance
events are reported to the system control and communication unit through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T

EM6T
EM6T
PROG
STAT
SRV
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F
EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
LINK1
LINK2
PROG
STAT
SRV
PRODUCT
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Indicators
Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

OptiX RTN 910

l There is no power supplied to the board.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off When the board is being powered on or
for 100 ms repeatedly being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and off When the board is being powered on or
for 300 ms repeatedly being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off for When the board is being powered on or
100 ms repeatedly being reset, the BOOTROM self-check
fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.
LINK1a On (green) The GE1 interface is connected correctly

and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.
Off The GE1 interface is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.


OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Interfaces
Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F
Inte Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

rfac
e
FE1 FE interface
FE2
FE3
RJ-45 5.8 Network Cable
FE4
GE1 GE electrical
interface
GE2
GE1 GE optical LC (SFP optical module) 5.5 Fiber Jumper

interface (EM6F)
GE2
The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptation
modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-41 and refer
to Table 3-79 and Table 3-80.
87654321
Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode

(+)

OptiX RTN 910

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)

OptiX RTN 910
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-81.
Off The link fails.

receiving data.

receiving data.
Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.8.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1
Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9
Slot 1
Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F
Item Description

OptiX RTN 910

The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module
01 1000BASE-SX (Multi- 34060286

mode, 0.5 km)
02 1000BASE-LX (Single- 34060473

mode, 10 km)
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052
(100m)

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
Performance of Optical Interfaces

The optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces.
Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical Single-mode optical

fiber fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Interfaces

The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Performance of FE Electrical Interfaces

The FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)


OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
EM6T EM6F
Dimensions 19.82mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.37 kg 0.38 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be
The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.

OptiX RTN 910
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications for Optical Interfaces

l Provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.
l All the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications for Optical Modules

l Adopts the SFP optical module to facilitate the later maintenance of the optical module.
l Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
l Supports the enabling and disabling of the laser.
l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
NOTE
The ALS function is described as follows:

1. After detecting that the R_LOS alarm persists over the receive port for 500 ms, the optical module
automatically shuts down the laser of the transmit port.
2. The laser changes to emit alternative laser pulses. The laser pulses are emitted for 2s after a 60s
interval.
3. After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the regenerator section overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Processes the multiplex section overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Processes the higher order path overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination
mode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the
overhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the
receive direction, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default,
the board adopts the pass-through mode.
Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.

OptiX RTN 910
in an SNCP group.
in a linear MSP group.
l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
l Supports the setting of linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
For details on SNCP and linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature
Description.

NOTE
l Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.
NOTE
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backplane
Service
bus
STM-1 Cross-connect unit
conversion
processing
processing
Overhead
Logic
O/E
unit
unit
unit
System control and
STM-1
Overhead
communication unit
bus
System control and
Control bus communication unit
Logic
control
unit
Supplies power to the +3.3 V

other units on the board unit System clock signal
Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects the R_LOS alarm.
l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical
signals.

OptiX RTN 910
2 Overhead processing l Restores the clock signal.

unit l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the
l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and
events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports it to the system control and communication
unit.
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K
bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the
logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the
corresponding performance events.
l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates
the corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4

bandwidth.
Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D


OptiX RTN 910
2 Overhead processing l Sets the higher order path overheads.

unit l Sets the AU pointer.
l Sets the multiplex section overheads.
l Sets the regenerator section overheads.
l Performs scrambling.
3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

The SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1D
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D

SL1D
SL1D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D

normally.

OptiX RTN 910

to the board.

service.


configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of

the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off The first optical interface of

the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface

of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical interface

of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.
Interfaces
Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces

Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

first STM-1 optical
interface
RX1 Receive port of the

first STM-1 optical
interface
TX2 Transmit port of the LC (SFP)

second STM-1
optical interface

OptiX RTN 910

Cable
RX2 Receive port of the

second STM-1
optical interface
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)

Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D
Slot 3 (SL1D) Slot 4 (SL1D)

Slot 5 Slot 6
Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D
Item Description

The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
name.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D
Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the

Optical Module
01 Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km) 34060287
02 S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km) 34060276
03 L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km) 34060281
04 L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km) 34060282

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,

Item Performance

(km)
(nm)

(dBm)

OptiX RTN 910
Item Performance

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
NOTE
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance

(width)
Weight 0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 3.4 W
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.

OptiX RTN 910

The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Overhead and Pointer Processing

l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.
l Supports the query of the J2 and V5 bytes.
l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 bytes.
Clock Processing
l Supports the E1 retiming function.
l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

NOTE
l Supports the inloop and outloop over the E1 tributary interfaces.
l Supports the PRBS 15 test.

OptiX RTN 910
NOTE
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
a service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane
Mapping/Demappi
E1 signal Service bus
processing unit
E1
Interface unit
Codec unit
ng unit
Logic
Cross-connect unit
E1
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control
unit
-48 V1
+3.3V power supplied Power
to the board Supply Unit -48 V2
+3.3V backup power +3.3 V

supplied to the board

System clock signal
other units on the board unit
Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
1 Interface unit The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformer

and then are transmitted to the board.

OptiX RTN 910
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers the clock signal.
l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.
l Performs the HDB3 decoding.
3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s.

Demapping unit l Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thus
forming VC-12s.
l Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s.
l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thus
forming one TUG-2.
l Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thus
forming one TUG-3.
l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thus
forming one C-4.
l Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4,
thus forming one VC-4.

unit l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D

unit l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the
l Extracts the E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs the HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then
are transmitted to the external cable.

OptiX RTN 910

The SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication
unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the
SP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events
are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S

SP3S
SP3S
STAT
E1
SRV
1-16
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D

SP3D
SP3D
21 42
STAT
SRV
1 22

OptiX RTN 910
Indicator
Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D


normally.

to the board.

service.


configured.
Interface
Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S

Interface Description Connector Corresponding Cable
Type
1-22 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 E1 Cable to the External

E1 interfaces Equipment or E1 Cable to the
E1 Panel
Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D

Type
1-22 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 E1 Cable to the External

E1 interfaces Equipment or E1 Cable to the
E1 Panel

OptiX RTN 910

Type
23-42 The seventeenth to Anea 96 E1 Cable to the External

thirty-second E1 Equipment or E1 Cable to the
interfaces E1 Panel
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16
correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment information
of the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-51 and Table 3-101.

POS.1
POS.96








OptiX RTN 910




















OptiX RTN 910






3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1
Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 5 Slot 6
Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D

Item Description

OptiX RTN 910

The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D

A 120
B 75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3

OptiX RTN 910
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SP3S SP3D
Weight 0.54 kg 0.64 kg
Power consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.
The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, and board in-position unit.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and power access interfaces.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slot.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.

OptiX RTN 910
l Power access
The PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the equipment. The
maximum power and maximum current of each power supply are 170 W and 5 A
respectively.
l Power protection
The PIU protects the DC power supplies against overcurrent and short circuits. In this
manner, the board and board components are prevented from being blown out in the case
of overcurrent.
l Lightning protection
The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection
fails.
l Power backup
The two DC power supplies provide 1+1 hot backup for each other.

The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-54 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Lightning protection Backplane

-48 V/-60 V and failure detection Other boards
unit
Alarm signal
Lightning protection indicating lightning
-48 V/-60 V and failure detection failure Other boards
unit
Alarm signal indicating Inter-board
lightning failure communication
Communication bus System control and
Board in-
Board position signal System control and
in-position unit communication unit
Lightning Protection and Failure Detection Unit

This unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightning
protective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to system
control and communication unit, through the communication unit.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm
signals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.
Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.

OptiX RTN 910
3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and power access interfaces.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-55 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
NEG1 RTN1 NEG2 RTN2
(+)
PWRB
(+) (-)
PWRA
(-)
-48V -60V
Indicators
Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators

Indicator Status Description
PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.
Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power

supply is connected incorrectly.
PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.

Interfaces
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-107 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU
and their respective usage.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface Interface Type Usage
NEG1(-) -48 V power input Inputs the -48 V power.

interface
RTN1(+) BGND power input Inputs the BGND power.

interface
NEG2(-) -48 V power input Inputs the -48 V power.

interface
RTN2(+) BGND power input Inputs the BGND power.

interface
Label
The label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.
CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
ensure that these power supplies are disabled.
3.11.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slot.
Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 1
Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 6

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-108 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-108 Technical specifications
Item Performance
Dimensions 41.4 mm (width) x 224.8 mm (depth) x 21.0

mm height)
Weight 0.12 kg
Power Consumption < 0.5 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.

The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should
be the same as the physical slot.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.

The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN has the following functions and features:
l Accesses one +12 V power supply for driving the three fans each of which consumes 6 W
power.

OptiX RTN 910
l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against
overcurrent.
l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system
with lowest power consumption and lowest noise.
l Reports the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position information.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Disables the power supplies to the fans.

The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-58 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN

Three fans
+12 V
+12 V +12 V
Start System control and
delay communication unit
+12 V
+12 V power
shutdown signal
Inter-board
communication
Communication unit bus System control and
communication unit
Fan rotating
Rotating speed speed System control and
reporting unit communication unit
PWM signal PWM driving System control and
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit
Fan in-position
Board in-position signal System control and
Start-Delay Unit
This unit protects the fan power supplies against start delay and overcurrent.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient
temperature information to the system control and communication unit. In addition, it provides
the +12 V power shutdown signal to the start-delay unit.

OptiX RTN 910
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Unit

This unit reports the fan rotating speed to the system control and communication unit and adjusts
the fan rotating speed based on the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals that are received
from the system control and communication unit. The PWM signals of the fans are isolated from
each other.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-109.
Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed

Working Temperature Rotating Speed
≤ 25°C Low speed (3200 rotation/min)
25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature
≥ 60°C Full speed (16000 rotation/min)
Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position information to the system control and communication
unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-59 shows the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN

OptiX RTN 910
Indicators
Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators
FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should
be the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 10
Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 6

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.
Table 3-111 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.

OptiX RTN 910
Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance
Dimensions 42.0 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height)
Weight 0.200 kg
Power consumption <2.3 W (room temprature)

<17 W (high temperature)
Working voltage 10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
4 Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). You need to select the accessories based on the actual requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The
E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.

OptiX RTN 910
4 Accessories IDU Hardware Description
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The
E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.
The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1
panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16
1-8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Interfaces
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel

Interface Description Type of Connector
T1-T16 Transmit port of the 1st to BNC

16th E1 ports (connected to
the external equipment)
R1-R16 Receive port of the 1st to 16th

E1 ports (connected to the
external equipment)
1-8 1st to 8th E1 ports (connected DB37

to an IDU)
9-16 9th to 16th E1 ports

(connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt Connecting a protection -

ground cable
NOTE
The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to
Table 4-2.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
20 1st E1 receiving differential 21 1st E1 transmitting differential

signal (+) signal (+)
2 1st E1 receiving differential 3 1st E1 transmitting differential

signal (-) signal (-)
22 2nd E1 receiving differential 23 2nd E1 transmitting differential

4 2nd E1 receiving differential 5 2nd E1 transmitting differential

24 3rd E1 receiving differential 25 3rd E1 transmitting differential

6 3rd E1 receiving differential 7 3nd E1 transmitting differential

26 4th E1 receiving differential 27 4th E1 transmitting differential









OptiX RTN 910


Others Reserved - -
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU

1 2 3 4
1 2 3
OUTPUT
4
A B
1 2
OUTPUT
3 4
ON ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF OFF
INPUT
20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A
5 6
1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals

OptiX RTN 910
3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)

5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)
Interfaces
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU
Position Interface Description
Output power + Power output (+)

terminals (A)
- Power output (-)
PGND Grounding stud For connecting the PGND cable

terminals of the two-hole
OT terminal
Input power RTN1(+) The first power input (+)

terminals
RTN2(+) The second power input (+)
NEG1(-) The first power input (-)
NEG2(-) The second power input (-)
Output power + Power output (+)

terminals (B)
- Power output (-)
Power 20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse
switches (A) capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side,
respectively.
Power 20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse
switches (B) capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side,
respectively.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
l Each input power supply supports four outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.
l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.

OptiX RTN 910
Working Principle
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers
(MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+
SW1 1
-
+
2
SW2 -
INPUT
+
3
SW3 -
RTN1(+)
+
BGND 4
SW4
-
RTN2(+)
OUTPUT B
NEG1(-) +
SW1 1
BGND -
NEG2(-) +
2
SW2 -
+
SW4 3
-
+
PGND SW4 4
-
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is
inside the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode

When the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits
terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
5 Cables
About This Chapter
This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cables
of the IDU 910.
5.1 Power Cable

The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.7 Orderwire Cable
The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the interface of the orderwire phone.
5.8 Network Cable

OptiX RTN 910
5 Cables IDU Hardware Description
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.

OptiX RTN 910
5.1 Power Cable

The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable

Single cord end terminal
1U DC connector Power cable
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable
Model Cable Terminal
2.5 mm2 power Power Cable, 450 V/ Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal,
cable and 750 V, H07Z-K-2.5 Conductor Cross Section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A,
terminal mm2, Blue/Black, Insertion Depth 8 mm, Blue
Low Smoke Zero
Halogen Cable
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the power cable whose core has a sectional area of 2.5 mm2 can extend for
a maximum distance of 50 m.
5.2 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

OptiX RTN 910
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

Main label
1 Cable tie H.S.tube
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.

OptiX RTN 910
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

Main label
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-N
connector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with a
TNC connector and is connected to the IF board.
NOTE
l The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
l When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-
inch IF cable to the IF board.

OptiX RTN 910
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper

1
H.S.tube 2 PCS 2
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignment
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPIC
working group.
When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-IN
port and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:
l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,
and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction.
l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very
short, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction. The XPIC cable
using straight connectors is also used to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the same
IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The OptiX RTN 910 uses the XPIC cables with angle connectors.

OptiX RTN 910
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable

1
1
L1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
Cable Connection Table

None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE optical
interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

OptiX RTN 910
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable
An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1
cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cables
and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

OptiX RTN 910
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable

Main label
1
W
X1 A
View A Pos.96
Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pos .1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l The appearance of the 120–ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75–ohm E1 cable.
l The core of a 75–ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use 2.5 mm (0.098–inch) crimp pliers to terminate
the ends of E1 cables on the DDF frame with 75–1–1 coaxial connectors.
Pin Assignment
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin W1 Remark Pin W2 Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
1 Tip 1 R1 25 Tip 2 T1
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R2 27 Tip 4 T2
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R3 29 Tip 6 T3
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R4 31 Tip 8 T4
8 Ring 32 Ring

OptiX RTN 910

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
9 Tip 9 R5 33 Tip 10 T5
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R6 35 Tip 12 T6
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R7 37 Tip 14 T7
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R8 39 Tip 16 T8
16 Ring 40 Ring
17 Ring 17 R9 41 Ring 18 T9
18 Tip 42 Tip
19 Ring 19 R10 43 Ring 20 T10
20 Tip 44 Tip
21 Ring 21 R11 45 Ring 22 T11
22 Tip 46 Tip
23 Ring 23 R12 47 Ring 24 T12
24 Tip 48 Tip
49 Ring 25 R13 73 Ring 26 T13
50 Tip 74 Tip
51 Ring 27 R14 75 Ring 28 T14
52 Tip 76 Tip
53 Ring 29 R15 77 Ring 30 T15
54 Tip 78 Tip
55 Ring 31 R16 79 Ring 32 T16
56 Tip 80 Tip
Shell Braid Shell Braid

OptiX RTN 910
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable

s s
Color of Relatio Color of Relatio
the n the n
Core Core
1 White Twisted R1 25 White Twisted T1

pair pair
2 Blue 26 Orange

pair pair
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twisted R3 29 Red Twisted T3

pair pair
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twisted R4 31 Red Twisted T4

pair pair
8 Orange 32 Green

pair pair
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twisted R6 35 Black Twisted T6

pair pair
12 Blue 36 Orange

pair pair
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black Twisted R8 39 Yellow Twisted T8

pair pair
16 Grey 40 Blue

pair pair
18 Blue 42 Orange

pair pair
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twisted R11 45 Red Twisted T11

pair pair
22 Grey 46 Blue

pair pair
24 Orange 48 Green

pair pair
50 Brown 74 Grey

OptiX RTN 910

s s
Color of Relatio Color of Relatio
the n the n
Core Core

pair pair
52 Blue 76 Orange

pair pair
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twisted R16 79 Yellow Twisted T16

pair pair
56 Grey 80 Blue
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel

The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel

A B X2
Pos.1 X1 Pos.1
Pos.44 Pos.37
A B
1500 mm
X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

OptiX RTN 910
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel
Connector Connector Remarks Connector Connector Remarks
X1 X2 X1 X2
X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5
X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17
X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6
X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15
X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7
X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13
X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8
X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11
X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5
X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16
X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6
X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14
X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7
X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12
X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8
X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable

An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 interface or a 120-ohm E1 interface.

OptiX RTN 910
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors
View B
Pos.44 #4-40
M092
Label 2
B Main Label
Pos.1 X3 W2
W1
Label 1
A
2 X1
X2 400
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44
connectors
Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
W1 X1.2 X2.38 R1 X1.10 X2.34 R5
X1.1 X2.23 X1.9 X2.19
X1.26 X2.15 T1 X1.34 X2.11 T5
X1.25 X2.30 X1.33 X2.26
X1.4 X2.37 R2 X1.12 X2.33 R6
X1.3 X2.22 X1.11 X2.18
X1.28 X2.14 T2 X1.36 X2.10 T6
X1.27 X2.29 X1.35 X2.25
X1.6 X2.36 R3 X1.14 X2.32 R7
X1.5 X2.21 X1.13 X2.17

OptiX RTN 910
Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
X1.30 X2.13 T3 X1.38 X2.9 T7
X1.29 X2.28 X1.37 X2.24
X1.8 X2.35 R4 X1.16 X2.31 R8
X1.7 X2.20 X1.15 X2.16
X1.32 X2.12 T4 X1.40 X2.8 T8
X1.31 X2.27 X1.39 X2.7
W2 X1.18 X3.38 R9 X1.50 X3.34 R13
X1.17 X3.23 X1.49 X3.19
X1.42 X3.15 T9 X1.74 X3.11 T13
X1.41 X3.30 X1.73 X3.26
X1.20 X3.37 R10 X1.52 X3.33 R14
X1.19 X3.22 X1.51 X3.18
X1.44 X3.14 T10 X1.76 X3.10 T14
X1.43 X3.29 X1.75 X3.25
X1.22 X3.36 R11 X1.54 X3.32 R15
X1.21 X3.21 X1.53 X3.17
X1.46 X3.13 T11 X1.78 X3.9 T15
X1.45 X3.28 X1.77 X3.24
X1.24 X3.35 R12 X1.56 X3.31 R16
X1.23 X3.20 X1.55 X3.16
X1.48 X3.12 T12 X1.80 X3.8 T16
X1.47 X3.27 X1.79 X3.7
5.7 Orderwire Cable

The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the interface of the orderwire phone.

OptiX RTN 910
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable

1 Main label
6 6
1 1
X1 X2
1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
5.8 Network Cable

The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface
(MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, the
network card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDI-
X interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDI-
X interface, see Table 5-9.
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface

(+)

(-)

(+)

OptiX RTN 910

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are
used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the
straight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiX
RTN 910 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover

OptiX RTN 910
cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, EXT interface, and Ethernet service
electrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable

1
Label 1 Main Label Label 2
8 8
1 1
1. Network port connector, RJ-45
Pin Assignment
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

OptiX RTN 910
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.7 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.11 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.12 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

OptiX RTN 910
A Parameters Description IDU Hardware Description
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
A.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
On the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Address Type IP Address of GNE IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
NSAP Address used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
IP Address Range of GNE based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address of
GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.

OptiX RTN 910
Search Address - - l If Address Type is set

to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP address
of the gateway NE.
User Name - - This parameter specifies

the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password - - This parameter specifies

the password of the
gateway NE.
Parameter for Searching for NEs

Search for NE Selected Selected This parameter specifies

Deselected whether to search for all
the NEs in the specified
domain.

OptiX RTN 910
Create NE after search Selected Deselected l To create NEs in

Deselected batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE after
search. The NEs are
automatically created
after they are found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are used
for creating an NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User - - l This parameter

specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password - - l This parameter

specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Upload after create Selected Deselected l This parameter

Deselected specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameter for the Found NEs

NE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
For example, in the case of
NE9-25, the value 9
indicates the extended ID,
and the value 25 indicates
the NE ID.
GNE Address - - This parameter indicates

the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE Yes Yes l This parameter

No specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Connection Mode Common Common The communication

Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.
NE Status Created - This parameter indicates

Uncreated whether the found NE is
created.
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
1. In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.
2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the NE to be
created.
ID - - l The ID refers to the

basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
Name - - l This parameter

specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you specifies the
name of the NE, the
name is displayed
under the icon of the
NE.
Remarks - - This parameter specifies

the remarks of the NE.

OptiX RTN 910
Gateway Type Non-Gateway Non-Gateway l This parameter is set to

Gateway Gateway if the new NE
is a gateway NE.
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a non-
gateway NE.
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a non-
gateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicates

the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway IP IP l This parameter needs to

Protocol OSI be set when Gateway
Type is set to
Gateway.
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address - - This parameter indicates

the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
Connection Mode Common Common The communication

Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.
NE User - - This parameter specifies

the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.

OptiX RTN 910
Password - - This parameter specifies

the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates

the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.
Parameters for Changing NE IDs

New ID - - l The new ID refers to

the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
according to the
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.

OptiX RTN 910
New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

NE Name - - This parameter indicates

the name of the NE.

the ID of the NE.
Synchronous Mode Standard NTP Null l If this parameter is set

NM to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
Null of the NMS server.
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP Enabled Disabled This parameter is valid

Authentication Disabled only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Standard NTP Server NE ID NE ID l If the NE functions as

Identifier IP the gateway NE, this
l If the NE functions as a
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the HWECC protocol,
NE ID.
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the IP protocol, this
Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as

the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
non-gateway NE, this
ID or IP address of the
gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server 0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does

Key not need to
authenticated, this
value "0".
l If the NTP server needs
to be authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according to
the allocated key of the
NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Synchronization - - l This parameter

Starting Time specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
DST Selected Deselected l This parameter

Deselected indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period 1 to 300 1 l This parameter

(days) indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE

Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time
Localization Management.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is

enabled.
Parameters for Time Zone

Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the

current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST Selected Deselected l The parameters related to daylight saving

Deselected time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
Offset 1 to 120 - This parameter specifies the offset value of

Unit: minute(s) the daylight saving time.
Start Rule DATE WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

WEEK adjusting the daylight saving time.
Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight

saving time.
End Rule DATE WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

WEEK adjusting the daylight saving time.
End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight

saving time.
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.


the name of the NE.

the ID of the NE.
Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameter

indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
according to the
requirements of the
Password - - l This parameter

indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
according to the
requirements of the

OptiX RTN 910
Trusted Yes Yes l When this parameter is

No set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After receiving
the key, the NE rejects
the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the key,
the NE provides the
clock synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
set a trusted key only.
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions

of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
NE Type OptiX RTN 910 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.

OptiX RTN 910
Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling Disabled Enabled This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Auto Disabling 1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of

Time(min) automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.
2. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of
the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click
.
3. Click Search.
Parameters for Searching For Fibers

Source NE - - This parameter indicates

the name of the source NE
on which fibers or radio
links are found.

OptiX RTN 910
Source Board - - This parameter indicates

the board and slot of the
source NE on which fibers
or radio links are found.
Source Port - - This parameter indicates

the number of the port on
the board of the source NE
links are found.
Sink NE - - This parameter indicates

the name of the sink NE on
which fibers or radio links
are found.
Sink Board - - This parameter indicates

the board and slot of the
sink NE on which fibers or
radio links are found.
Sink Port - - This parameter indicates

the number of the port on
the board of the sink NE
links are found.
Level - - This parameter indicates

the level of the found fiber
or the working mode of
the found radio link.
Name - - This parameter indicates

the name of the found
fiber or radio link.
Direction Two-Fiber Bidirectional - This parameter indicates

Single-Fiber the direction of the found
Unidirectional fiber.
Conflict with logical link Yes - This parameter indicates

(Y/N) No whether the found fiber or
radio link conflicts with
the fiber or radio link
displayed on the NMS.
Operation Result Succeeded - This parameter indicates

Failed whether the cable is
created successfully.
Fiber/Cable Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the found fiber
or cable.

OptiX RTN 910
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.
Parameters for Fibers

Create Ways Common Ways Common Ways l If Common Ways is

Batch Ways selected, fibers need to
created one by one.
l If Batch Ways is
selected, fibers can be
created in batches.
Fiber/Cable Type Fiber Fiber This parameter indicates

that Fiber/Cable Type to
be created is a fiber.
Name - - This parameter specifies

the name of the fiber to be
created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.

the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE - - This parameter specifies

the source NE on which
the fiber needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board - - This parameter specifies

Type-Port the board, slot, and port of
the fiber needs to be
created.
Rate Level - - This parameter indicates

the level that corresponds
to the port on the board.

OptiX RTN 910
Medium Type G.652 G.652 This parameter specifies

G.653 the medium type of the
fiber.
G.654
G.655
Sink NE - - This parameter specifies

the sink NE on which the
fiber needs to be created.
Sink NE Slot-Board - - This parameter specifies

fiber needs to be created.
Direction Two-Fiber Bidirectional - This parameter specifies

Single-Fiber the direction of the fiber to
Unidirectional be created.
Length(km) - - This parameter specifies

the length of the fiber to be
created.
Attenuation(dB) - - This parameter specifies

the attenuation of the fiber
to be created.
Created On - - This parameter specifies

the time when the fiber is
created.
Creator - - This parameter specifies

the name of the person
who creates the fiber.
Maintainer - - This parameter specifies

who maintains the fiber.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Microwave Links

Fiber/Cable Type Radio Link Radio Link This parameter indicates

that a radio link needs to
be created is Fiber/Cable
Type.

the name of the radio link
to be created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.

the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE - - The parameter specifies

the radio link needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board - - This parameter specifies

the radio link needs to be
created.
Rate Level - - This parameter indicates

the level that corresponds
to the port on the IF board.
Sink NE - - The parameter specifies

radio link needs to be
created.
Sink NE Slot-Board - - This parameter specifies

radio link needs to be
created.
Length(km) - - This parameter specifies

the length of the radio link
to be created.
Created On - - This parameter indicates

the time when the radio
link is created.

OptiX RTN 910
Creator - - This parameter specifies

who creates the radio link.
Maintainer - - This parameter specifies

who maintains the radio
link.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

OptiX RTN 910
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter

Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

IP Address - Before delivery, In the HWECC solution, an IP address is

the IP address of set according to the following rules:
the NE is set to l The IP address, subnet mask, and
129.9.0.x. The default gateway of the gateway NE
letter x indicates should meet the planning requirements
the basic ID. of the external DCN.
Gateway IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0 segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set
in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That
is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when

the number of actual NEs does not
exceed the range permitted by the basic
NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
Connection Mode Common Common The communication between the client

Security SSL and the server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to Security SSL.

OptiX RTN 910
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate

Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Port - - This parameter indicates the port that is

connected to the DCC channel.
NOTE
On the NMS interface, the first interface on the
system control, switching, and clock board (like
1-CSHC-1) corresponds to its external clock
interface.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled (for line It is recommended that you use the default
Disabled ports) value, except for the following cases:
Disabled (for l If the port is connected to the other ECC
external clock subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
interfaces) Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If external clock interfaces are used to
transparently transmit the DCC solution,
Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
the external clock interfaces.
Channel Type D1-D3 D1-D1 (for the PDH It is recommended that you use the default
D4-D12 radio whose value, except for the following cases:
transmission l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
D1-D12 capacity is less than solution is adopted, Channel Type for
D1-D1 16xE1) the SDH line ports is set to a value that is
D1-D3 (for other the same as the value for third-party
cases) network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of Channel
Type for the SDH line ports should not
conflict with the value that is set for the
third-party network.

OptiX RTN 910
DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC

resources.
Communication - - This parameter indicates the

Status communication status.
Protocol Type HWECC HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
TCP/IP value, except for the following cases:
OSI l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
LAPD Role User User l This parameter is valid only when

Network Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD
Role must be set to User for one end and
must be set to Network for the other end.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent

Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the source timeslot

Porta or port.

OptiX RTN 910
Transparent D1 - l Only one overhead byte can be selected

Transmission of D2 each time.
Overhead Bytes at l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the
Source Port D3
customized overhead bytes that are used
D4 for transmitting asynchronous data
D5 services.
D6 l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is
D7 used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the sink timeslot or

Porta port.

OptiX RTN 910
Transparent D1 - l Only one overhead byte can be selected

Transmission of D2 each time.
Overhead Bytes at l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is
Sink Port D3
used. For example, an overhead byte
D4 cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
D5 l Generally, Transparent Transmission
D6 of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
D7 set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
D8 Source Timeslot/Port.
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port

Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

ECC Extended Automatically Automatically It is recommended that you use the default
Mode Assign Assign value.
Specified mode
Parameters for Setting the Server

IP - 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address of

the server.
Port 1601 to 1699 1601 l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the U2000 functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
Port 1601 to 1699 1601 mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the extended
ECC. Except for the NE that functions as
the server, all other NEs that use the
extended ECC can function as the client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set
to the IP address of the server NE and the
specified pot number.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the

ECC connection.
Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer

NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance 0 to 64 0 l This parameter specifies the number of

NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route passes,
namely, the number of ECC packet
forwarding attempts. The value can be set
to a value that is greater than the number
of actual ECC packet forwarding
attempts. If the value is set to a value that
is less than the number of actual ECC
packet forwarding attempts, however, the
destination NE fails to be accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level 4 - l This parameter indicates that multiple

5 ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode Manual - This parameter indicates the ECC routing

Automatic mode.
SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port

through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.

OptiX RTN 910
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP

Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Destination - - This parameter specifies the destination

Address address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Gateway IP - - This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol DIRECT - l DIRECT: indicates the route between

STATIC the local NE and an adjacent NE.
OSPF l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
RIP
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
OSPF_ASE local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
OSPF_NSSA l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered
by the routing information protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so stubby
area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the
other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.

OptiX RTN 910
Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is

used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Hop Count 0 to 65535 - This parameter indicates the maximum

number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Hop Count is used
to indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
Working Status Working - This parameter indicates whether the

Unworking current IP route is available.
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP

Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Destination - - This parameter specifies the destination

Address address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.

OptiX RTN 910
Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF

Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Area - - l The OSPF protocol supports the division

of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs
in the same area can transmit the OSPF
packets to each other to generate the
route.
l When setting the area for the NEs, you
need to set the NEs that run the OSPF
protocol to the same area.
DCC Hello Timer 1 to 255 1 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
(s) packet timer at the DCC interface.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.

OptiX RTN 910
DCC Neighbor 1 to 65535 6 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

Dead Time(s) the dead time of a neighbor router at the
DCC interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the hello
packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of twice
the value of DCC Hello Timer(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC 1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

Retransmission the interval for transmitting a request
Timer(s) through the DCC interface to retransmit the
link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to

transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of DCC Delay
(s).
LAN Hello Timer 1 to 255 - l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
(s) packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.

OptiX RTN 910
LAN Neighbor 1 to 65535 - l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

Dead Time(s) the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the hello
packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in LAN
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN 1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

Retransmission the time for transmitting a request for
Timer(s) retransmission of the LSA packets through
the LAN interface.
LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to

transmit the LSA packets through the
LAN interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of LAN Delay
(s).
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Proxy ARP Disabled Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
Enabled same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each other.
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns a ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address
of the destination NE. In this manner, the
packet that is to be sent to the destination
NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy
ARP function enabled and then
forwarded to the destination NE.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer

Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters


NE.

OptiX RTN 910
Configuration Role L1 L1 l Configuration Role cannot be set to

L2 ES.
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and access the other area
by distributing the default route of the
nearest L2 NE.
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE
in the other area and can use a route in the
backbone area. The backbone area is a
collection that is formed by consecutive
L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles
must be consecutive (connected to each
other).
Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Routing Tables

Port - - This parameter indicates the port used for

OSI communication.
Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that is

used at the data link layer.
Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier of

the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by the
NE.
Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

adjacency.

OptiX RTN 910
Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of the

adjacency.
Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that is

contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System - - This parameter indicates the system ID of

ID the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Destination Area - - This parameter indicates the area ID of the

ID destination NE.
Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID of

the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric - - ++This parameter indicates the number of

hops that reach the destination NE or
destination area.
Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

OptiX RTN 910
LAPD Actor User User l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.
Network l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD - - This parameter indicates whether the

Enable current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable Enabled Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD

LAPD Enable Disabled is enabled.
LAPD Parameters
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to 1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time

Retry(s) to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

OptiX RTN 910
L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry

Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer

(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.

OptiX RTN 910
L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer

(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 Hello
Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer

(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
default value.

OptiX RTN 910
L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer

(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
default value.
COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.

l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Ethernet Board 1 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCN

VLAN ID can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according to
the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the VLAN ID of the inband DCN
can be changed manually. The same
VLAN ID must be, however, is used on
the network-wide inband DCN.
Bandwidth(kbps) - - This parameter specifies the bandwidth of

the inband DCN.
E1 Port - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this

Bandwidth(kbps) parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
(kbps) parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
(kbps) parameter.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting FE or GE Ports

Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the FE

or GE port.

OptiX RTN 910
Enable Status Enabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the FE

Disabled or GE port is enabled.
l The inband DCN can transmit the
network management information over
the link only after the inband DCN
function is enabled at the FE or GE ports
at both ends of a link.
Parameters for Setting IF Ports

Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the IF

port.
Enable Status Enabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the IF

Disabled port is enabled.
l The inband DCN can transmit the
network management information over
the link only after the IF ports at both ends
of a link are enabled on the inband DCN.
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol

Port - - Displays the port name.

OptiX RTN 910
Protocol Type IP IP l If the values of ProtocolType are

HWECC different from each other, the equipment
at both ends cannot be interconnected
with each other. Therefore, Protocol
Type must be set to the same value for
the equipment at both ends of a link.
to the planning information. Generally, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to IP.
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

The First Network Enabled Enabled After The First Network Port is set to
Port Disabled Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Enable Serial Port Selected Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
Access Deselected selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command Selected Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, the

Line Deselected serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM Selected Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interface

Deselected can be used to access the NMS.

OptiX RTN 910
Baud Rate 1200 9600 l This parameter specifies the data

2400 transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
4800
l This parameter is set according to the rate
9600 of the serial port at the opposite end, and
19200 the rates at both ends must be the same.
38400
57600
115200
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control


NE.

OptiX RTN 910
LCT Access Access Allowed Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
Control Switch Disable Access case, when the LCT requests an LCT user
to log in to the NE, the NE does not check
the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

OptiX RTN 910

Workgroup_Creation
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters
IF Channel 28M - l This parameter specifies the working

Bandwidth 56M bandwidth of the radio link.
l When this parameter is set to 56M, the
high-power ODU must be used.
Polarization - - l This parameter indicates the polarization

direction-V direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you set the IF port
Polarization
on the IFX2 board that has a smaller slot
direction-H
number to Link ID-V and the IF port on
the other IFX2 board to Link ID-H.
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.
Link ID-H 2 l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link

and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and Link
ID-H must also be set to the same value
at both ends of a link.

OptiX RTN 910
Transmit Power - - l This parameter specifies the transmit

(dBm) power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l The transmit power of the ODU must be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.
Maximum - - l This parameter specifies the maximum

Transmit Power transmit power of the ODU. This
(dBm) parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
Transmission - - l This parameter indicates the channel

Frequency(MHz) central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.

OptiX RTN 910
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,
the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
lower than the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Transmission unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the

Status mute ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU normally transmits and receives
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.

OptiX RTN 910
ATPC Enabled Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is 2
dB higher or lower than the central value
the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper -75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC
Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Enabled automatic threshold function is enabled.
Status l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.

OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the XPIC tab.

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization - - This parameter indicates the IF port to which

direction-V the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction V
corresponds.

direction-H the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
IF Channel 28M - l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the

Bandwidth 56M channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.

OptiX RTN 910
Power to Be - - l This parameter is used to set the expected

Received -V(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.

Received -H(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE

OptiX RTN 910

modulation module..
exceed this value.
Transmit Power - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(dBm) transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l The transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the planning information.

OptiX RTN 910
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
by the ODU is used.
radio link.
Transmission unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Status mute transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work but
can normally receive microwave signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.

direction the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.

OptiX RTN 910
AM Enable Status Disabled Disabled l When this parameter is set to Disabled,

Enabled the radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain

of the Guaranteed 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
AM Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
256QAM availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.

of the Full AM 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
NOTE
Enable Status is set to Enabled.

OptiX RTN 910
Manually Specified QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation

Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
256QAM
Guaranteed E1 - - l When AM Enable Status is set to

Capacity Enabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and cannot be set.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and cannot
be set.
E1 Capacity 1 to 75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in Hybrid
work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1
Capacity.
The E1 Capacity must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

OptiX RTN 910
ATPC Enable Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
attributes.
ATPC Upper -75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
threshold to a value for the expected
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference
between the planned central value
the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.

OptiX RTN 910
ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Enabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.

WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enabled Enabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the SD

Disabled switching function of N+1 protection is
enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

OptiX RTN 910
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Select Mapping Work Unit Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction Protection Unit direction of N+1 protection.
Select Mapping - - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF

Way ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit

and protection unit that have been set.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters

Protection Group - - This parameter indicates the ID of the

ID protection group.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.

OptiX RTN 910
SD Enable Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line - - This parameter indicates the information

about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End - - This parameter indicates the local end or

Indication remote end.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2. Click Create.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters
Working Mode HSB HSB l This parameter specifies the working

FD mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
SD l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
Non-Revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
Mode l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive Mode.

OptiX RTN 910
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the

Switching Disabled reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board

of the protection group.
Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection

board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

OptiX RTN 910
Protection Group Parameters


Working Mode HSB HSB l This parameter indicates the working

FD mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
SD
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter indicates or specifies the
Non-Revertive revertive mode of the protection group.
Mode l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive Mode.

OptiX RTN 910
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the default
value.
Enable Reverse Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Switching Disabled whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
Switching Status of - - l This parameter indicates the switching

Device state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of - - l This parameter indicates the switching

Channel state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of - - This parameter indicates the current

Device working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of - - This parameter indicates the current

Channel working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

OptiX RTN 910

Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board

and protection board.
Slot Mapping - - This parameter indicates the names and

Relation ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of - - This parameter indicates the working state

Device on the equipment side.
Signal Status of - - This parameter indicates the status of the

Channel link signal.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Configuring the IF

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

2,4E1,3.5MHz, work mode of the radio link in "work
16QAM mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K l This parameter is set according to the
planning information. The work modes
4,8E1,7MHz, of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
16QAM link must be the same.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP NOTE
SK This parameter is not applicable to the IFU2
6,16E1,14MHz, board and the IFX2 board.
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM

OptiX RTN 910
Enable AM Disabled Disable l When this parameter is set to Disabled,

Enabled the radio link uses only the specified
Modulation Mode.
the radio link uses the corresponding
channel conditions.
enabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Channel Space 7M 7M Channel Space indicates the channel

14M spacing of the corresponding radio link.
This parameter is set according to the
28M planning information.
56M NOTE
Guaranteed QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain

Capacity 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
Modulation supports. This parameter is set according to
128QAM service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
This parameter is valid only when Enable
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 910
Full Capacity QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain

Modulation 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
NOTE
Full Capacity Modulation must be higher than
Guaranteed E1 Capacity.
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTE
Manually Specified QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation

Modulation 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
64QAM
AM is set to Disabled.
128QAM NOTE
256QAM This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Guaranteed E1 - - l When Enable AM is set to Enabled, this

Capacity parameter depends on Channel Space
and Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is not
configurable.
l When Enable AM is set to Disabled, this
parameter depends on Channel Space
and Manually Specified Modulation
Mode and is not configurable.
NOTE
Specified Max E1 - - This parameter specifies the number of E1

Capacity services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode. The value of this
parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed
E1 Capacity.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 910
Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link ID
does not match the preset value of Link
ID at the local end, the local end inserts
the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates the received ID of

the radio link.
NOTE
When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
ATPC Enable Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled. If the APTC
function is enabled, the transmit power of
the transmitter automatically varies
within the specified ATPC range
according to the change of the RSL at the
receive end.
attributes.
receive power.

OptiX RTN 910
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 Lower Threshold(dBm) to the

Threshold(dBm) difference between the planned central
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Enabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Disabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
link.
Threshold(dBm).
Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with
Timeslot Disabled the packet radio equipment, this parameter
is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter
is set to Disabled.
NOTE

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Configuring the ODU

TX Frequency - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
Range of TX - - l This parameter indicates the range of the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Frequency(MHz) frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX - - This parameter indicates the actual receive


OptiX RTN 910
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,
the TX frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower
than the receive frequency.
spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating
that the T/R spacing supported by the
ODU is used.
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.
TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
radio link.
TX High - - l If the value of the actual transmit power

Threshold(dBm) of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration

OptiX RTN 910
TX Low Threshold - - when the value of the actual transmit

(dBm) power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater than
the preset value of TX Low Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low
Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the
ATPC function is enabled.
RX High - - l If the value of the actual receive power of

Threshold(dBm) the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is greater than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX High
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold

OptiX RTN 910
RX Low Threshold - - of RX High Threshold(dBm), the

(dBm) system does not record it.

Received(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
l This parameter needs to be according to
the planning.

OptiX RTN 910

modulation module.
exceed this value.
Range of TX - - This parameter indicates the range of the

Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power - - l This parameter indicates the actual

(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual RX Power - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

(dBm) power of the ODU.
TX Status Unmute Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Mute transmit status of the ODU.
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
you set this parameter to unmute.
Actual TX Status Unmute - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Mute status of the ODU.
Equipment Information
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.

OptiX RTN 910
Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and is irrelevant to the type
of transmitted service.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission - - This parameter indicates the level of the

Power Type output power of the ODU.
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.

OptiX RTN 910

Protection Type 1+1 Protection 1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the protection
1:N Protection type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted or
several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended Single-Ended l This parameter specifies the switching

Switching Switching (1+1 mode of the linear MSP.
Dual-Ended Protection) l In single-ended mode, the switching
Switching Dual-Ended occurs only at one end and the state of the
Switching (1:N other end remains unchanged.
Protection) l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs
at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.

OptiX RTN 910
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive (1+1 l This parameter specifies the revertive
Revertive Protection) mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive (1:N l When this parameter is set to Revertive,
Protection) the NE that is in the switching state
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

OptiX RTN 910
Protocol Type New Protocol New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the early
Restructure Protocol stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.

Select Mapping West Working Unit West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction West Protection direction of the linear MSP.
Unit
Select Mapping - - l This parameter specifies the mapping

Mode board and port in the mapping direction.
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as West
Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West Protection
Unit and the line port mapped as West
Working Unit should be configured for
different boards if possible.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot

mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.


Protection Type 1+1 Protection - l This parameter indicates the protection

1:N Protection type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted or
several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Switching switching mode of the linear MSP.
Dual-Ended l In single-ended mode, the switching
Switching occurs only at one end and the state of the
other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs
at both ends at the same time.
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.

OptiX RTN 910
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Revertive revertive mode of the linear MSP.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive,
the NE that is in the switching state
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

OptiX RTN 910
Protocol Type New Protocol - l The new protocol is supported at the early
Restructure Protocol stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status

of the linear MSP.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the

units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line - - This parameter indicates the west protection

- unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching - - This parameter indicates the switching

Status status of the line.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working

channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End - - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-

Indication Ended Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

OptiX RTN 910
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create.
Parameters
Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

VC3 service to be created.
VC4 l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.

OptiX RTN 910
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to the
service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to the
service sink and the cross-connections
from the service sink to the service
source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot - - l This parameter indicates the timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

OptiX RTN 910
Sink Timeslot - - l This parameter specifies the timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service sink.
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Activate Yes Yes l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately No immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP

Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
l Click Create SNCP Service.

Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.

OptiX RTN 910
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the cross-
connections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

VC3 SCNP service to be created.
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Hold-off Time 0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

(100ms) the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l If multiple link-based protection
schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,
and N+1 protection, are available at the
same time, the hold-off time needs to be
set to a duration that is longer than the
switching duration for the multiple link-
based protection schemes.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.

OptiX RTN 910
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

Revertive switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
occurs.
default value.

service source.

source is located.
tributary board.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

service sink.

OptiX RTN 910

is located.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP Selected Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Tangent Ring Deselected Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate Selected Selected l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately Deselected immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service

Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-
click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.

OptiX RTN 910
3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.

Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of the

SNCP service.
Level VC12 - l This parameter indicates the level of the

VC3 SNCP service.
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter
value is VC3.
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.
Hold-off Time 0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

(100ms) the hold-off time.
time to 0.

OptiX RTN 910
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

Revertive switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
occurs.
default value.

service source.

source is located.
tributary board.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

OptiX RTN 910

service sink.

is located.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP Selected Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Tangent Ring Deselected Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate Selected Selected l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately Deselected immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service

OptiX RTN 910
Cross-Connection Parameters

VC3 service.
channels, VC12 is displayed.
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service sink.
Activation Status Yes - This parameter indicates whether to activate

No the service.
Bound Group - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
Number parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections


VC3 service.
displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service

Service Type - - This parameter indicates the service

protection type of the protection group.

OptiX RTN 910
Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.

VC3 service.
displayed.
Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current

switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode Revertive - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Non-Revertive revertive mode of the service.
l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.

OptiX RTN 910

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
Hold-off Time 0 to 100 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(100ms) duration of the hold-off time.
time to 0.

OptiX RTN 910
Initiation TIM Null l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Condition EXC conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
SD
l If TIM is selected, the SNCP service
UNEQ considers the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm
Null as an automatic switching condition.
l If EXC is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_EXC or BIP_EXC
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l If SD is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm as
an automatic switching condition.
l If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP service
considers the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l It is recommended that you set Initiation
Condition to the same condition for
Working Service and Protection
Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
Initiation Condition are optional values
not included in the default values, and
they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the

working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
A.7 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

OptiX RTN 910
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters
Clock Source - - l External clock source 1

indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME port on
the CSTA, CSHA,
CSHB, or CSHC board
in physical slot 1.
l The internal clock
source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter

Mode 2MHz indicates the type of the
external clock source
signal.
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.

OptiX RTN 910
Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid

only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
l This parameter needs to
be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority - - Displays the priority

Sequence (1 is the sequence of clock sources.
highest) 1 indicates the highest
clock source priority.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Affiliated Subnet 0 to 255 0 l This parameter is used

when the clock subnet
needs to be created on
the NMS.
l The NEs that trace the
same clock source
should be allocated
with the same clock
subnet ID.

OptiX RTN 910
Protection Status Start Extended SSM Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
Protocol scheme used for
Start Standard SSM synchronous
Protocol management on an
SDH network and
Stop SSM Protocol indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes. The
SSM protocol ensures
that the equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard SSM
protocol is started, the
NE first performs the
protection switching on
the clock source
according to the clock
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the protection
switching according to
the clock priority table.
That is, the NE selects
an unlocked clock
source that is of the
highest quality and
highest priority from all
the current available
clock sources as the
clock source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock

OptiX RTN 910
source only according

to the sequence
specified in the priority
table. The clock source
of the highest priority is
used as the clock source
to be traced.
l After the SSM protocol
is stopped, each NE
performs the protection
switching on the clock
according to the preset
priority table of the
clock source only when
the clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.

OptiX RTN 910
Clock Source ID (None) (None) l This parameter is valid

1 to 15 only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
l Clock source IDs are
allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
– External clock
source
– Internal clock source
of the node that
accesses the external
clock sources
– Internal clock source
of the joint node of a
ring and a chain or
the joint node of two
rings
– Line clock source
that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock Quality tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Clock Source Quality


the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configuration Quality Unknown Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies

Synchronization Quality the quality level that is
G.811 Clock Signal configured for the clock
source. This function is
G.812 Transit Clock required only in a special
Signal scenario or in a test.
G.812 Local Clock Signal Generally, this parameter
G.813 SDH Equipment need not be set.
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Clock Quality - - This parameter indicates

the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level


the name of the NE.

OptiX RTN 910
Manual Setting of 0 Do Not Use For Do Not Use For This parameter specifies
Quality Level Synchronization Synchronization the clock quality whose
G.811 Reference Clock level is manually set to
zero.
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit l Do Not Use For
Clock Synchronization: the
notification
G.812 Transit Clock information in the
Between G.812 Transit reverse direction of the
Clock and G.812 Local selected
Clock synchronization clock
G.812 Local Clock source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
Between G.812 Local adjacent NEs.
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source l G.811 Reference
(SETS) Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
SETS Clock 811.
Between synchronous l Between G.811
equipment timing source Reference Clock and
(SETS) and quality G.812 Transit Clock:
unavailable lower than the quality
level of the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811 but higher than the
transit exchange clock
signal specified in ITU-
T G.812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock: lower than the
transit exchange clock
T G.812 but higher than
the quality level of the
local exchange clock
T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock: the
local exchange clock
T G.812.

OptiX RTN 910
l Between G.812 Local

Clock and synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level of
the local exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812 but
higher than the quality
of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
lower than the quality
of the SETS but higher
than the quality level
unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output

Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Control Status Enabled Enabled l This parameter is valid

Disabled only when the SSM
protocol or the
extended SSM protocol
is started.
l This parameter
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set this parameter to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID

Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock ID Status tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled Status Enabled Enabled l This parameter is valid

Disabled only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
l This parameter
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports are
connected to the NEs in
the same clock subnet
and if the extended
SSM protocol is started
on the opposite NE, this
parameter is set to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock

Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters

the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock Auto-Revertive Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a

Source Reversion Mode Non-Revertive higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lower-
priority clock source. If
Auto-Revertive, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higher-
priority clock source
when this higher-
priority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE does
not automatically
switch the clock source
to the higher-priority
clock source when this
higher-priority clock
source restores.
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality, select
Auto-Revertive.
Otherwise, to prevent
jitter of the clock,
generally, it is
Non-Revertive.

OptiX RTN 910
Clock Source WTR 0 to 12 5 l This parameter

Time(min.) specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
unstability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
only when Higher
Priority Clock Source
Reversion Mode is set
to Auto-Revertive.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock

Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters

the name of the clock
source.
Effective Status Valid - This parameter indicates

Invalid whether the clock source
is valid.

OptiX RTN 910
Lock Status Lock - l This parameter

Unlock specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
l Lock: A clock source in
the priority table is in
the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock source
in the priority table is in
the unlocked state. The
clock source in the
unlocked state can be
switched.
Switching Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status Normal - This parameter indicates

Manual Switching the switching status of the
current clock source.
Forced Switching
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the

External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
2M Phase-Locked External Clock Source 1 - This parameter indicates

Source Number the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.

OptiX RTN 910
External Clock Output 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter

Mode 2MHz specifies the mode of
the output clock.
be set according to the
requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2 Mbit/
s signal.
External Clock Output SA4 to SA8 ALL l This parameter is valid

Timeslot ALL only when External
Clock Output Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.

OptiX RTN 910
External Source Output Threshold Disabled Threshold Disabled l This parameter

Threshold Not Inferior to G.813 specifies the lowest
SETS Signal quality of the output
clock. If the clock
Not Inferior to G.812 quality is lower than the
Local Signal value of this parameter,
Not Inferior to G.812 it indicates that the
Transit Clock Signal external clock source
Not Inferior to G.811 does not output any
Clock Signal clock signal.
to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked No Failure Condition No Failure Condition l This parameter

Source Fail Condition AIS specifies the failure
condition of the 2 Mbit/
LOF s phase-locked clock
AIS OR LOF source.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked Shut Down Output Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
Source Fail Action 2M Output S1 Byte only when 2M Phase-
Unavailable Locked Source Fail
Condition is not set to
Send AIS No Failure Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the failure
conditions.
you use the default
value.

OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
Parameters

the name of the NE.
NE Clock Working - - This parameter indicates

Mode the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization - - This parameter indicates

Quality Information the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Synchronous - - This parameter indicates

Source the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicates

the synchronization
source.

OptiX RTN 910
Data Output Method in Normal Data Output Normal Data Output l When all the reference
Holdover Mode Mode Mode timing signals are lost,
Keep the Latest Data the slave clock changes
to the holdover mode.
At this time, the slave
clock works based on
the latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output
Mode: The slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost,
and the holdover
duration depends on the
size of the phase-
locked clock register on
the equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

OptiX RTN 910
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies

the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction UNI-UNI UNI-UNI l This parameter

UNI-NNI specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
NNI-NNI
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently l This parameter

Transmitted Transmitted specifies the
Transparently transparent
Transmitted transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets. It
is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
according to the
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
Source Port - - l This parameter is valid

only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
l The number of VLANs
must be the same value
of Sink VLANs.
Otherwise, you need to
create a VLAN
forwarding table for
swapping VLAN IDs.
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
set to UNI-NNI.

OptiX RTN 910
QinQ Link ID - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID.
l A QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
set to UNI-NNI.
Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
set to NNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the first QinQ
link.
set to NNI-NNI.
l The QinQ link ID is
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
set to NNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the second QinQ
link.
set to NNI-NNI.
l The QinQ link ID is

OptiX RTN 910
Sink Port - - l Before setting this

parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
l The number of VLANs
must be the same value
of Source VLANs.
at the sink port are used
as the service sink.
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used as
the service sink.

OptiX RTN 910
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node - - This parameter indicates

the source node.
Sink Node - - This parameter indicates

the sink node.

not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte) 1518 to 9600 - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
BPDU Not Transparently - l This parameter

Transmitted indicates the
Transparently transparent
Transmitted transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
This parameter is used
to indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
are used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
Active Active - This parameter indicates

Inactive whether E-Line service is
active.
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports

Port - - This parameter indicates

the UNI port.

OptiX RTN 910
VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter

indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Port - - l This parameter

indicates the NNI port.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter

indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
l This parameter is preset
in QinQ Link.
Parameters for the Port Attributes


the QinQ link ID of the
QinQ link connected to
the port.

OptiX RTN 910
Enable Port - - l This parameter

indicates whether to
enable the port.
in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
Encapsulation Type Null - l This parameter

802.1Q indicates the
encapsulation type of
QinQ the port.
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
to Null, the port
transparently transmits
the received packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q standard.
to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
TAG Tag Aware l This parameter

Access indicates the tag of the
port.
Hybrid
in Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet
Interface .

OptiX RTN 910
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table

Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of
the source interface.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies

the source interface.
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies

the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
cannot be set manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
of the network.

OptiX RTN 910
Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

S-Awared that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag-Transparent Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Self-Learning MAC Enabled Enabled l This parameter

Address Disabled specifies whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table needs to be
configured. Otherwise,
the Ethernet LAN fails
to forward the services.
MAC Address Learning - - l This parameter

Mode indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.

not support this
parameter.

not support this
parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for UNIs


the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters of NNIs

set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter

ID of the NNI port.
set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.

OptiX RTN 910
Split Horizon Group - - l A split horizon group

Member member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.

OptiX RTN 910

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
l Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
of the network.

OptiX RTN 910
Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

S-Awared that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag-Transparent Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
Self-Learning MAC Enabled Enabled l This parameter

Address indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.

OptiX RTN 910
MAC Address Learning - - l This parameter

Mode indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.

not support this
parameter.

not support this
parameter.
Parameters for UNIs


the UNI port.

ID of the UNI port.
set to S-Awared.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

of the UNI port.
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port. That
is, the entire port is
mounted to the bridge.
to a non-null value,
only the corresponding
UNI port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Parameters for NNIs


set to S-Awared.

OptiX RTN 910
SVLANs - - l This parameter

ID of the UNI port.
set to S-Awared.
the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is

invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset static
MAC address entries
are valid for only the
VLANs whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
MAC Address - - l This parameter

the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not aged
automatically and
needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is

invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset self-
learning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs whose
VLAN ID is equal to
the preset VLAN ID.
according to the

the self-learning MAC
address. A self-
learning MAC address
is also called a dynamic
MAC address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Aging Ability Enabled Enabled The OptiX RTN 910

Disabled supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
Aging Time(min) - 5 function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

VLAN ID - 1 This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.

OptiX RTN 910

specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an entry,
also called a black hole
entry, whose data
frame that contains a
specific destination
MAC address. A
disabled MAC address
needs to be set
manually and cannot be
aged.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Frame Type Unicast 1 This parameter indicates

Multicast the type of the received
unknown frame.
Handing Mode Discard Broadcast Selects the method of

Broadcast processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Split Horizon Group - - l A split horizon group

Member member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Maintenance Association Parameters

Maintenance - - This parameter indicates the maintenance

Domain Name domain of the created maintenance
association.

OptiX RTN 910
Maintenance - - l This parameter specifies the name of the

Association Name maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
CC Test Transmit 1s 1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

Period 10s transmitting packets in the CC test.
1m l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
10m
Parameters for the MEP


Domain Name domain of the created MEP.

Association Name association of the created MEP.
Node - - This parameter indicates the MEP node.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of

Egress the MEP.
l "Ingress" indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and "Egress" indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active Active l This parameter specifies whether to

Inactive enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

OptiX RTN 910
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board - - This parameter specifies

the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies

the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
according to the
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

OptiX RTN 910
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly
Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port - - This parameter specifies

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPLOwner Ring Node Yes No l This parameter

Flag No specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
RPL Port - - l This parameter

specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or west
port on the RPL owner
node.

OptiX RTN 910
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APS
channel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs on
an ERPS ring.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates

the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port - - This parameter indicates

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter indicates

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Yes - This parameter indicates

Flag No whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter indicates

the RPL port.
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APS
channel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs on
an ERPS ring.

OptiX RTN 910
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates

destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 - l This parameter

the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating the
sequence when the
ERPS coexists with
other protection
schemes so that the
fault can be rectified in
the case of other
(such as LAG
protection) before the
ERPS occurs. When a
node on the ring detects
one or more new faults,
it starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset hold-
off time is set to a value
that is not 0. During the
hold-off time, the fault
is not reported to
trigger an ERPS. When
the hold-off timer times
out, the node checks the
link status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can be
the same as or different
from the fault that
triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.

OptiX RTN 910
Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 - l This parameter

the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the ring
receives the outdated
R-APS packets, an
incorrect ERPS may
occur. The ERPS guard
timer is an R-APS timer
used for preventing a
node on the ring from
receiving outdated R-
APS packets. When a
faulty node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-
APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer expires.

OptiX RTN 910
WTR Time(min) 5 to 12, in step of 1 - l This parameter

the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers to
the duration from the
time when the working
channel is restored to
the time when the
switching is released.
When the working
channel is restored, the
WTR timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not transmitted.
In addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by the
unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit 1 to 10 - This parameter displays or

Interval(s) specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level 0 to 7 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates

the last switching request.

OptiX RTN 910
RB Status - - This parameter indicates

the RB status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB (RPL Blocked):
The RPL is blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is requested to
clear the forwarding
address table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this case,
the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed not
to clear the forwarding
address table.

OptiX RTN 910
Status of State Machine - - This parameter indicates

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receive the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with - - This parameter indicates

Current Packet the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group

Creation
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.

OptiX RTN 910

Protocol Type MSTP MSTP This parameter specifies

STP the protocol type.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled l This parameter

Disabled specifies whether to
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the port
group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically re-
configured. As a result,
the services are
interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports


the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.

OptiX RTN 910
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group

Configuration
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port


the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.

OptiX RTN 910

Port Group ID - - l This parameter

port group.
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.
Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.
Bridge Parameters
Port Group ID - - l This parameter

port group.
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.

OptiX RTN 910
Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameter

specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches that
are connected to the
link. When you set
Network Diameter for
the switches, the MSTP
automatically sets Max
Age(s), Hello Time(s),
and Forward Delay(s)
to the more appropriate
values for the switches.
l If the value of Network
Diameter is greater,
the network is in a
larger scale.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter

specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value of
this parameter, the less
the network resources
that are occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

OptiX RTN 910
Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter

specifies the maximum
age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded
by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the value
of this parameter is
greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter

specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the recovery
in the case of faults is
slower.
Port Parameters

the port in the port group.

OptiX RTN 910
Enable Edge Attribute Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
In normal cases, this
port does not receive or
transmit BPDU
messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the actual management
edge attributes of the port.

OptiX RTN 910
Point-to-Point Attribute false auto l This parameter

true specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
auto port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is half-
duplex, Actual Point-
to-Point Attribute is
false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point - - This parameter indicates

Attribute the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.

OptiX RTN 910
Max Transmit Packet 1 to 255 3 l This parameter

Count specifies the maximum
number of packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Port Group - - This parameter specifies

the port group.
MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates

the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). TheOptiX RTN
910 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.

OptiX RTN 910
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16

bits of the bridge ID
indicates the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge whose
MAC address is the
smallest is selected as
the root bridge.
Port Parameters

Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.

OptiX RTN 910
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running

Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode MSTP Disabled l This parameter

STP indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.

OptiX RTN 910
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter

the bridge.
l The most significant 16
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
MAC address is the
the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

bridge.
Root Bridge MAC - - This parameter indicates

Address the MAC address of the
root bridge.
External Path Cost - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

ERPC not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

Priority not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

MAC Address not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter

the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
higher.
Root Port - - This parameter indicates

the root port.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

age of the CBPDU
by the port.
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater, it is less
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.

OptiX RTN 910

specifies the holdoff
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower.
MST Domain Max Hop - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

Count not support this
parameter.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change - - This parameter indicates

Time(s) the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the count of the topology
changes.
Port Parameters

Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates

Disabled whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Port Role - - This parameter indicates

the role of a port.

OptiX RTN 910
Port Status Discarding Discarding This parameter indicates

Learning the state of a port.
Forwarding l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
l Learning: only receives
or transmits BPDU
packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16

the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
MAC address is the
the root bridge.

OptiX RTN 910
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

bridge.
Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Design Port - - This parameter indicates

the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute Disabled Enabled l This parameter

Enabled specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
In normal cases, this
port does not receive or
transmit BPDU
messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Port - - This parameter indicates

Attribute the actual management
edge attributes of the port.

OptiX RTN 910
Point to Point false auto l This parameter

true specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
auto port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is half-
duplex, Actual Point
to Point Attribute is
false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates

the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.

OptiX RTN 910
Max Count of 1 to 255 3 l This parameter

Transmitting Message indicates the maximum
number of packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode STP - l This parameter

MSTP indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

OptiX RTN 910

age of the CBPDU
by the port.
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater, it is less
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.

specifies the holding
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower.
Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping

Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.

Service ID - - This parameter indicates

the service ID.
Enabled Protocol Enabled Disabled l This parameter

Disabled specifies whether to
enable the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
l If the bridge accesses a
LAN where the IGMP
multicast server exists,
you can enable the
IGMP Snooping
protocol according to
the requirement.
Router Port Aging Time 1 to 120 8 l If an entry is not

(min) updated in a certain
period (that is, no
IGMP query packet is
received), this entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is
called aging, and this
period is called aging
time.
to a very large value,
the bridge stores
excessive multicast
entries that are
outdated.
Consequently, the
resources of the
multicast table are
exhausted.
to a very small value,
the bridge may delete
the multicast entry that
is required.
Consequently, the
forwarding efficiency
decreases.

OptiX RTN 910
Maximum Times of No 1 to 4 3 l This parameter

Response from Multicast specifies the maximum
Members number of multicast
group members who do
not respond.
l If the IEEE 802.1q
bridge transmits an
IGMP group query
packet to the multicast
member ports, the
IEEE 802.1q bridge
starts the timer for the
query of the maximum
number of responses. If
no IGMP report
packets are received
within the query time,
the IEEE 802.1q bridge
adds one to the number
of no responses at the
port. When the number
of no responses
exceeds the preset
value of Maximum
Times of No Response
from Multicast
Members, the IEEE
802.1q bridge deletes
the additional multicast
members from the
multicast group.
Maximum Number of - - l This parameter

Multicast Groups specifies the maximum
number of allowable
multicast groups.
l The multicast group
records the mapping
relations between the
ports on the router,
MAC multicast
addresses, and member
ports in the multicast
group.

OptiX RTN 910
Maximum Number of - - l This parameter

Multicast Group specifies the maximum
Members number of allowable
multicast group
members.
l A multicast group
member refers to the
host that is added to a
multicast group.
Actual Multicast Count - - This parameter indicates

the number of actually
used multicast groups.
Actual Multicast - - This parameter indicates

Members Count the number of actually
used multicast group
members.

Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
3. Click Add.
Parameters for Fast Leave Ports


the service ID.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter

specifies the VLAN
where the port to be
quickly deleted is
located.

OptiX RTN 910
Port Type V-UNI V-UNI l This parameter

V-NNI specifies the type of the
port to be quickly
deleted.

the port to be quickly
deleted.

Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
Parameters for Router Port Management

Service ID - - This parameter specifies

the ID of the created E-
LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicates

the VLAN ID of the router
port.
Port Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the router port.

the router port.
Port Status - - This parameter indicates

the status of the router
port.
Port Creating Time - - This parameter indicates

the time when the router
port is created.

OptiX RTN 910
Port Remainder Aging - - This parameter indicates

Time(min) the remaining aging time
of the router port.

Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation


LAN service.

the VLAN ID of the router
port.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates

the available ports.
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates

the specified router port.

Configuration_Route Member Port Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Multicast Groups Information


LAN service.

the VLAN ID of the
multicast group.
Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

the multicast MAC
address.
Multicast Groups Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the multicast
group.
Multicast Group - - This parameter indicates

Creating Time the time when the
multicast group is set up.
Parameters for Multicast Group Members Information


LAN service.

the VLAN ID of the
multicast group member.

the type of the multicast
group member.

the multicast group
member port.
Port Remainder Aging - - This parameter indicates

Times the remaining non-
response times of the
multicast group member
port.

OptiX RTN 910

Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation


LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the
multicast group.
Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter specifies

the multicast MAC
address.

the available interfaces.

the preset port of the
multicast group members.

Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Packet Statistics tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management


the service ID.
VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates

the VLAN ID of the
service.

the port type.

the port.
Packet Statistics Status Clear Clear This parameter indicates

Start or specifies the status of
collecting the packet
Stop statistics.
IGMPv1 Query Packet - - This parameter indicates

Count the number of received
IGMPv1 query packets.


IGMP Leaving Packet - - This parameter displays

Count the number of leaving
packets that are received.
IGMPv1 Member - - This parameter indicates

Report Packet Count the number of received
packets that are reported
by the IGMPv1 members.


Unrecognized or - - This parameter indicates

Unprocessed Packet the number of packets that
Count cannot be recognized or
processed.

OptiX RTN 910
Discarded Incorrect - - This parameter indicates

Packet Count the number of discarded
error packets.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation

Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New.

LAG No. 1 to 16 1 l This parameter

specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
only when
Automatically Assign
is not selected.
Automatically Assign Selected Selected l This parameter

Deselected indicates whether LAG
No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be set.
LAG Name - - This parameter specifies

the LAG name.

OptiX RTN 910
LAG Type Static Static l Static: You can create a

Manual LAG. When you add or
delete a member port to
or from the LAG, the
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP) protocol is
required. In a LAG, a
port can be in the
Selected or Standby
state. The aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the same
among all the nodes.
l Manual: You can
manually create a LAG.
When you add or delete
a member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. According to the
physical up or down
state, the port
determines whether to
perform an
aggregation.

OptiX RTN 910
Revertive Mode Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter can be

Non-Revertive set only when Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing.
l When a LAG is set to
Revertive, the services
are switched back to the
former working
channel after this
normal.
l When a LAG is set to
Non-Revertive, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
Load Sharing Sharing Non-Sharing l Sharing: Each member

Non-Sharing link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only one
member link of a LAG
carries traffic, and the
other link is in the
standby state. In this
case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.

OptiX RTN 910
Load Sharing Hash Source MAC Source MAC l This parameter is valid
Algorithm Destination MAC only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is set
Source and Destination to Sharing.
MAC
l The load sharing
Source IP computation methods
Destination IP include: MAC address
Source and Destination IP specific allocation
(based on the source
MAC address,
destination MAC
address, and XOR
between source MAC
address and source
MAC address), IP
address specific
allocation (based on the
source IP address,
destination IP address,
and XOR between
source IP address and
source IP address).

OptiX RTN 910
System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter

a LAG. The smaller the
value of System
Priority, the higher the
priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered as
the result of both LAGs
and is used to ensure
that the aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
Port Settings Parameters

Main Board - - l This parameter

specifies the main
board in a LAG.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
Main Port - - l This parameter

specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave - - l This parameter

Ports) specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
according to the
Port (Available Slave - - l This parameter

Ports) specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Slave Ports - - This parameter indicates

the selected slave ports.
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port

Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910
2. Click the Port Priority tab.


the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter

indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG as
defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher the
priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
2. Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points

Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the

convergence point.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the

board of the convergence point.
NOTE
One port can be in an LPT only.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Access Points

Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the

access point.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the

board of the access point.
NOTE
The access point supports selection of multiple
ports on different boards.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port
Mirroring from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.

Mirror Name - - l This parameter specifies the name of the

mirroring task.
l After the mirroring function of the port is
enabled, you can monitor all the mirrored
ports by analyzing the packets at the
mirroring port only. As a result, you can
easily manage the ports.
Direction Ingress Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction in

Egress which the service to be monitored.
l Ingress indicates that the Listened Port
copies the received packets to the Mirror
Listener Port and sends the packets out
of the Mirror Listener Port.
l Egress indicates that the Listened Port
copies the transmitted packets to the
Mirror Listener Port and sends the
packets out of the Mirror Listener
Port.
Mirror Listener - - l This parameter specifies the mirroring

Port listener port and the listened port.

OptiX RTN 910
Listened Port - - l Listened Port indicates the source port

of the mirrored packets.
l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port
from which the packets copied from the
Listened Port are sent out.
l Mirror Listener Port: The port where
services are available cannot be selected.
Otherwise, the creation fails.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM

Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.


Domain Name maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
of eight bytes.
Maintenance 0 4 l This parameter specifies the level of the

Domain Level 1 maintenance domain.
2 l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,
the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,
3 and the values 5-7 indicates the user level.
4 l When the value is set to 0, the
5 maintenance domain is at the lowest
6 level. The values 1-7 indicate that the
level increases in a sequential order.
7
l The OAM packets whose level is higher
than the preset value are transparently
transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM
packets whose level is lower than the
preset value are directly discarded by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is
the same as the preset value are responded
to or terminated by the MEPs according
to the message type.

Management_Maintenance Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path

OptiX RTN 910
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.

Choose New > New Maintenance Association.


Domain Name domain of the created maintenance
association.

Association Name maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service

instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit 1s 1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

Period 10s transmitting packets in the CC.
1 min l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
10 min

Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.

OptiX RTN 910


Domain Name domain of the created MEP.

Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MEP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MEP is located.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
Direction Ingress Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of

Egress the MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active Active l This parameter specifies whether to

Inactive enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.

OptiX RTN 910


Domain Name domain of the MEP.

Remote 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the

Maintenance Point remote MEP.
ID(_e.g:1,3-6) l If other MEPs may initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set the other MEPs to be the remote
MEPs.

Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.


Domain Name domain of the MIP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MIP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MIP is located.

OptiX RTN 910
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.

l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MIP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MIP ID is
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.

Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB.

MP ID Selected Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the

Deselected LB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Sink Maintenance Selected Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the

Point MAC Deselected LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
Address addresses.
Maintenance - - This parameter indicates the name of the

Domain Name maintenance domain for the LB test.

Association Name maintenance association for the LB test.
Source - - l This parameter specifies the source

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LB test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.

OptiX RTN 910
Destination - - l This parameter specifies the destination

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LB test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the
destination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination - 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

Maintenance Point address of the port where the destination
MAC Address maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Transmitted 1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of

Packet Count packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted 64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a

Packet Length transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Transmitted 0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of

Packet Priority transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant

information and result of the LB test.

Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.

OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

MP ID Selected Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

Deselected test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Sink Maintenance Selected Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

Point MAC Deselected test is performed on the basis of MAC
Address addresses.

Domain Name maintenance domain for the LT test.

Association Name maintenance association for the LT test.
Source - - l This parameter specifies the source

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LT test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination - - l This parameter specifies the destination

ID l Only the MEP can be set to the
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination - 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

Maintenance Point address of the port where the destination
MAC Address maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Detection Result

Source - - This parameter indicates the source

ID
Destination - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

Maintenance Point of the port where the destination
ID/MAC maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

Maintenance Point of the port where the responding
ID/MAC maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of

hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or to
the destination maintenance point in the
LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding point
occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result - - This parameter indicates the result of the LT

- test.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM

Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

port.

OptiX RTN 910
Enable OAM Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Protocol Disabled whether to enable the OAM protocol.
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the
current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
OAM Working Active Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Mode Passive working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Notification Disabled whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can be
reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.

OptiX RTN 910
Remote Side Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Loopback Enabled whether the port responds to the remote
Response loopback.
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Loopback Status Non-Loopback - This parameter indicates the loopback status

Initiate Loopback at at the local end.
Local NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
Respond Loopback OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
of Remote
OAM Discovery FAULT - This parameter indicates the OAM

Status ACTIVE_SEND_L discovery status at the local end.
OCAL
PASSIVE_WAIT
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE_OK
SEND_ANY
Port Transmit FWD - l This parameter indicates the status of

Status DISCARD transmitting packets at the local end.
l When a port is in the FWD state, the port
forwards the non-OAM packets. When a
port is in the DISCARD state, the port
discards the non-OAM packets.
Port Receive Status FWD - l This parameter indicates the status of

DISCARD receiving packets at the local end.
LB l In the FWD state, the port forwards the
non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the
port loopback the non-OAM packets. In
the DISCARD state, the port discards the
non-OAM packets.

OptiX RTN 910
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM

Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.


port.
Error Frame 1000 to 60000, in 1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
Monitor Window step of 100 monitoring error frames.
(ms)
Error Frame 1 to 4294967295, in 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Monitor Threshold step of 1 monitoring error frames.
(frame) l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error Frame
Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame 1488 to 892800000, 892800000 This parameter specifies the window of
Period Window in step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frame)

Period Threshold step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frame) l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 60 This parameter specifies the time window of
Second Window(s) 1 monitoring the error frame second.

OptiX RTN 910
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Second Threshold 1 monitoring error frame seconds.
(s) l If any error frame occurs in one second,
this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Second Threshold(s), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame 1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window of

Signal Periodic monitoring the error frame signal period.
Monitor Window
(Entries)

Signal Periodic step of 1 monitoring the error frame signal period.
Monitor Threshold l Within the specified value of Error
(Entries) Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Window(Entries), if the number of error
signals exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Threshold(Entries), an alarm is
reported.
A.11 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.

OptiX RTN 910
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates

the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates

the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.
The default Diffserv domain cannot be modified and deleted.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter

the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.

the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN, and
highest priority.

OptiX RTN 910
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter

indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the ingress
packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the differentiated
services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.

OptiX RTN 910
PHB BE - l This parameter

AF1 indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB) service
AF2 class of the DiffServ
AF3 domain.
AF4 l The PHB service class
EF refers to the forwarding
behavior of the
CS6 DiffServ node on the
CS7 behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


AF1 indicates the PHB
service class of the
AF2 DiffServ domain.
AF4 refers to the forwarding
EF behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
CS6 behavior aggregate
CS7 (BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DiffServ
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
highest priority.

OptiX RTN 910

the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
highest priority.

indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
packets.
l The DSCP refers to bits
0-5 of the DS field in
the packet.


the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type CVLAN CVLAN The packets trusted by the

SVLAN OptiX RTN 910 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP-DSCP IP DSCP packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, or DSCP value.
By default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
The E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.

OptiX RTN 910
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain

Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
2. Click Create.

Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 2 This parameter specifies

the ID of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies

Packet Type cvlan cvlan l This parameter

svlan specifies the type of the
packet.
ip-dscp
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 910 are
the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN and IP DSCP
packets that contain the
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
NOTE
mapping from DSCP
class.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping
Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The
default DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation


specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
highest priority.

priority of the ingress
packets.
highest priority.

specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
packets.
services code point
the packet.

OptiX RTN 910

service class of the DS
AF2 domain.
EF behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
CS6 aggregate (BA)
CS7 operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


service class of the DS
AF2 domain.
EF behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
CS6 aggregate (BA)
CS7 operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
highest priority.

OptiX RTN 910

priority of the egress
packets.
highest priority.

specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
services code point
the packet.


the board that uses the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
Available Port - - This parameter displays

the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relations between DS
domains.
Selected Port - - This parameter displays

the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relations
between DS domains.

OptiX RTN 910
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied

Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
3. Click the Apply Port tab.
4. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates


OptiX RTN 910
Packet Type CVLAN CVLAN l This parameter

SVLAN specifies the type of the
packet.
IP-DSCP
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 910 are
the C-VLAN, S-VLAN
and IP-DSCP packets
that contain the C-
VLAN priority, S-
VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
l When the OptiX RTN
910 receives services
and identifies service
types based on VLAN
priorities, the trusted
packets at a UNI ports
carry C-VLAN
priorities, and the
trusted packets at an
NNI port carry S-
VLAN priorities.
When the OptiX RTN
910 receives services
and identifies service
types based on DSCP
values, the trusted
packets at a port carry
IP-DSCP values.
NOTE
mapping from DSCP
class.

the board where the port is
located.

the available port.

OptiX RTN 910

the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied
to the default DS domain cannot be modified.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter

indicates the policy ID
of the port.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the policy
name of the port.

OptiX RTN 910
CoS CS7 - l The BE, AF1, AF2,

CS6 AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
EF respectively map eight
AF4 queuing entities. The
AF3 OptiX RTN 910
provides different QoS
AF2 policies for the queues
AF1 at different service
BE classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.

OptiX RTN 910
Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm is
WRR designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).

OptiX RTN 910

according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter

specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled indicates or specifies
whether traffic shaping
is enabled for an egress
queue corresponding to
a PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.

OptiX RTN 910
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it is
directly forwarded; if
the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded at
a rate equal to the PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the buffer queue and
then are forwarded at a
rate equal to the PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR in
a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter

specifies the policy ID
of the port.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Automatically Assign Selected Deselected This parameter specifies

Deselected whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies

the policy name of the
port.

OptiX RTN 910
CoS CS7 - l The BE, AF1, AF2,

CS6 AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
EF respectively map eight
AF4 queuing entities. The
AF3 OptiX RTN 910
provides different QoS
AF2 policies for the queues
AF1 at different service
BE class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.

OptiX RTN 910
Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm is
WRR designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 910
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).

OptiX RTN 910

according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter

specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Disabled l This parameter

whether traffic shaping
is enabled for an egress
queue corresponding to
a PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
the PIR is valid.

OptiX RTN 910
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

are processed as
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

packets can be
burst packets is
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification

Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.

Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the traffic
classification.
ACL Action Permit Permit l The access control list

Deny (ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets that
enter the port according
to the specified
matching rules.
set to Permit, the ACL
on the ingress side
filters the packets that
enter the port. Only the
packets that match the
specified rules can be
received by the port.
set to Deny, ACL
processing is not
performed for the
packets over the ingress
port.

OptiX RTN 910
Ingress Parameters
Logical Relation And And l This parameter

Between Matched Rules specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 910
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
Match Type DSCP Value - l After you click Add or

CVlan ID Delete, complex traffic
classification can be
CVlan priority performed on the traffic
SVlan ID that enters the ingress
SVlan priority port according to the
preset matching rules.
l In the case a specific
service, complex traffic
classification can be
divided into basic
traffic types according
to the DSCP value,
C_VLAN ID,
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN ID, or
S_VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based on
the associated Ethernet
packets. Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63 - l If the matching value of

CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 the packets is the same
as the preset Match
CVlan priority: 0 to 7 Value, the packets
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 match the rules of
SVlan priority: 0 to 7 complex traffic
classification.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
CoS - - l This parameter

CS7 specifies the PHB
service class queue
CS6 mapped by the traffic
EF classification packets.
AF4 l If this parameter is set
AF3 to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
AF2 map the PHB service
AF1 class queue according
BE the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Enabled l This parameter

whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These packets
are first forwarded in
the case of network
congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than the
CIR but not more than
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

PIR, the packets that
exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
l When the rate of the
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
CBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,

if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is not more than
the CIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
can be first forwarded
in the case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,

if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is more than the
the PIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is
according to the
Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter

specifies the CAR
operation performed by
the equipment on the
packets. The packets
are dyed according to
the result of the CAR
operation. The dying
rule is determined by
the comparison
between the rate of the
packets and the preset
CAR value.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports Color
Blindness only.

OptiX RTN 910
Packet Color Red - Packets can be dyed in

Yellow three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
Green red are first discarded.
Handling Mode Discard - l This parameter

Pass specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Remark
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.
Relabeled CoS CS7 - If the handling method is

CS6 set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
EF packets.
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE

OptiX RTN 910
Egress Parameters
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Enable l This parameter

Enable indicates or specifies
whether the traffic
shaping is performed in
the egress function.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

packets exist in the
egress queue: When the
rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR,
these packets directly
enter the egress queue.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
the egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the CIR.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

egress queue: If the rate
of the packets is more
than the CIR but is not
more than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR enter
If the rate of the packets
is more than the PIR,
the packets are directly
discarded.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets

is not more than the
CIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets are directly
transmitted. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the

OptiX RTN 910
PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets

is more than the CIR
but is not more than the
PIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets enter the egress
queue. The maximum
traffic of the burst
packets is determined
by the PBS.
according to the
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Slot No. - - This parameter specifies

the slot ID.

the port.
CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

CBS (byte) - - single token bucket two
PIR (kbit/s) - - color marker algorithm.
the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 910 processes the
packets in the buffer
queue through the

OptiX RTN 910
PBS (byte) - - following methods when

no packets are available in
the queue.
are processed as
packets can be
burst packets is
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
A.12 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

OptiX RTN 910
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics

Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be

monitored.
Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of the

monitoring period.
Display Selected Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of

Accumulated Deselected displaying the performance events.
Value l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the displayed
value is an absolute value that is currently
stored in the register.
Display Mode Graphics List l This parameter specifies the method of

List displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.

OptiX RTN 910
Legend Color - l This parameter indicates the description

Description of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - The parameter indicates the object to be

monitored.
Ended - - This parameter specifies the start time and

end time of the monitoring period.
History Table 30-Second 30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoring

Type 30-Minute period.
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
Display Mode Graphics List l This parameter specifies the method of

List displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color - l This parameter indicates the description

Description of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.

OptiX RTN 910
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance

items to be monitored.
Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value

of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of

each performance event.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History

Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
30-Second Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
30-Minute Enabled Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Minute
Custom Period 1 Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable Custom Period 1.

Disabled whether to enable Custom Period 2.
History Register 1 to 50 16 This parameter indicates or specifies the

Count(1-50) 6(Custom Period 2) quantity of the history registers.
Period Length(300 300 to 43200 900 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
to 43200 seconds, a monitoring period in Custom Period 1.
multiple of 30) l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.

OptiX RTN 910
Period Length(300 300 to 86400 86400 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
to 86400 seconds, a monitoring period in Custom Period 2.
multiple of 30) l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be

collected.
30-Second Enabled - This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Second
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Custom Period 1 Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.

OptiX RTN 910
Custom Period 2 Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Event Parameters
Event - - This parameter indicates the performance

event to be monitored.
30-Second Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
30-Minute Enabled - This parameter indicates or specifies


based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.

based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Threshold Detect Report All Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
Do Not Detect threshold detection method.
Report Only the l If the number of detected events reaches
Upper Threshold the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
Report Only the events are not reported to the NMS.
Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.

OptiX RTN 910
Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each

threshold of the performance events.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters
Call Waiting Time 1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting time

(s) after the local station dials the number. If
the calling station does not receive the
response message from the called station
within the call waiting time, it
automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to five seconds. If more
than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone This parameter indicates the dialling mode
Dual-Tone Frequency of the orderwire phone.
Frequency
Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone

number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When a OptiX RTN 910 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 910
receives the call, the orderwire phones on
the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the
orderwire point-to-multipoint group call
changes to a point-to-point call between
two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for all
the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.

OptiX RTN 910
Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire

phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available - - This parameter indicates the available port

Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.
Selected - - This parameter indicates the selected port

Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Orderwire E1 E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead

Occupied Bytes E2 byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the radio
link always uses a customized overhead
byte to transmit the orderwire signals.
Hence, this parameter should be set
according to the occupied SDH overhead
bytes in the ordinary SDH.

OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Available Data - - l This parameter indicates the available F1

Channel data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for
the configuration.
No. - - This parameter indicates the number of the

F1 data port.
Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is

selected, this parameter corresponds to
Data Channel 2 the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
l If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board.
The F1/S1 interface complies with ITU-
T G.703 and operates at the rate of 64
kbit/s.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical

SERIAL4 line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data - No Data l When this parameter is set to the

Source SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and
Clock Board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Available - - This parameter indicates the available

Broadcast Data broadcast data sink.
Sink
Selected Broadcast - - l When this parameter is set to the

Data Sink SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and
Clock Board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface
from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Basic Attributes

Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation

object.
Relay Control Auto Control Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
Mode Manual Control alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical
Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
Major Alarm(K0) Enabled the relay is set manually for major alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status
for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
Critical Alarm(K1) Enabled the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay


object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the channel.
Using Status Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the input relay is used.

OptiX RTN 910
Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/ Relay Turns Off/ l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
High Level High Level Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
Relay Turns On/ when the relay is turned off.
Low Level l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
Major Alarm alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Parameters for the Output Relay


object.
Output Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the output channel.
Use or Not Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the output relay is used.
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes


object.
Temperature -40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the upper

Upper Threshold temperature threshold of the board. When
(Deg.C) the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature -40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the lower

Lower Threshold temperature threshold of the board. When
(Deg.C) the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter indicates the severity of the
Major Alarm Major Alarm alarm.
Minor Alarm Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm Warning Alarm
Alarm Output CSK-1 CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
Channel CSK-2 output alarm relay.
CSK-3
CSK-4
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

OptiX RTN 910
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.

OptiX RTN 910
Received Radio 1 to 4094 - l This parameter indicates the received ID

Link ID of the radio link.
does not match the preset value of Radio
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports an alarm to the NMS,
indicating that the link IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the IF interface.
Outloop l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to locate
the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-
Loopback.
2M Wayside Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Enable Statusa Enabled whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Boarda slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.

OptiX RTN 910
350 MHz Stop Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Consecutive Wave Start status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier
Status signals at the IF interface.
l This parameter can be set to Start in the
commissioning process only. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Stop.
Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
XPIC Enabledb Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the XPIC function of the IFX2
board is enabled.
l If the IFX2 board does not perform the
XPIC function, this parameter should be
set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC
cable is required to perform self-loop for
the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.
Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with
Timeslotc Disabled the packet radio equipment, this parameter
should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this
parameter should be set to Disabled.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.
l b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.

OptiX RTN 910
ATPC Enable Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
attributes.
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
(dBm) is set to Disabled.

OptiX RTN 910
ATPC Automatic Enabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Disabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
link.
Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper - - l This parameter indicates that the

Automatic equipment automatically uses the preset
Threshold(dBm) ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
ATPC Lower - -
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
Automatic
set to Enabled.
Threshold(dBm)

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters

IF port.
IF Channel 7M 7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

Bandwidth 14M channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
28M planning information.
56M

OptiX RTN 910
AM Enable Status Disable Disable l When this parameter is set to Disable, the
Enable radio link uses only the specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enable, the
radio link uses the corresponding
channel conditions.
enabled.
Modulation Mode QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain

of the Guaranteed 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
AM Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
128QAM service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
Enable Status is set to Enable.

of the Full AM 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
NOTE
Enable Status is set to Enable.
Manually QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation

Specified 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
Modulation Mode transmission.
32QAM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disable.
128QAM
256QAM

OptiX RTN 910
Guaranteed E1 - - l When AM Enable Status is set to

Capacity Enable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and is not configurable.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and is not
configurable.
E1 Capacity - - This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode. The value of this
parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed
E1 Capacity.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the

ATPC adjustment.
Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of the

ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the

ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment - - This parameter indicates the direction of the

Direction adjustment at the port.
Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching

operation at the port.
Transmitted - - This parameter indicates the transmitted

Power(dBm) power of the port to be switched.

OptiX RTN 910
Received Power - - This parameter indicates the received power

(dBm) of the port to be switched.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the

PRBS test.
Direction Cross Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Tributary direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s s This parameter indicates or specifies the

10min time unit used for the PRBS test.
h
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.

OptiX RTN 910
Accumulating Selected Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display

Mode Deselected the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency

Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

ODU.
Transmit - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the central frequency of the channel.
less than the sum of the minimum
transmit frequency supported by the
ODU and a half of the channel spacing,
and must not be more than the difference
between the maximum transmit
frequency supported by the ODU and a
half of the channel spacing.
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.

OptiX RTN 910
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
by the ODU is used.
radio link.
Actual Transmit - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Actual Receive - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.
The Range of - - This parameter indicates the working range

frequency Point of the frequency of the ODU.
(MHz)
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Power Attributes tab.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters

ODU.

modulation module..
exceed this value.
Transmit Power - - l This parameter specifies the transmit

(dBm) power of the ODU. This parameter
cannot be set to a value that exceeds the
nominal power rang of the ODU or a
value that exceeds Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm).
radio link.

OptiX RTN 910

Received(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
TX High - - l If the value of the actual transmit power

Threshold(dBm) of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
transmit power of the ODU is greater than
the preset value of TX Low Threshold
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.

OptiX RTN 910
TX Low Threshold - - l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low

(dBm) Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the
ATPC function is enabled.

OptiX RTN 910
RX High - - l If the value of the actual receive power of

Threshold(dBm) the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.
of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX High
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
Actual Transmit - - l This parameter indicates the actual

Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Received - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

Power(dBm) power of the ODU.
Actual range of - - This parameter indicates the range of the

Power(dBm) actual transmit power of the ODU.
Equip Information

Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.

OptiX RTN 910
Station Type Tx Low - l This parameter indicates whether the

Tx High ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.

the ODU.
Transmission Standard Power - This parameter indicates the level of the

Power Type Output output power of the ODU.
High Power Output
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment

Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Equipment Information tab.
Parameters

ODU.

Equipment Type PDH - l This parameter indicates the equipment

SDH type of the ODU.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of

the ODU.

OptiX RTN 910
Intermediate - - This parameter indicates the IF frequency

Frequency bandwidth of the ODU.
Bandwidth (MHz)
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
Transmission - - This parameter indicates the level of the

Power Type output power of the ODU.
Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

time of the ODU.

the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters

ODU.

OptiX RTN 910
RF Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
back.
l This function is used for fault locating for
the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Configure unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Transmission mute transmit status of the ODU.
Status l If this parameter is set to mute, the
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
unmute.
Actual unmute - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Transmission mute status of the ODU.
Status
Factory - - This parameter indicates the manufacturer

Information information about the ODU.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters

SDH interface.
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

Namea name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha Open Open l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Close on/off state of the laser.
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
Open.
Optical(Electrical) Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Interface Inloop loopback status on the SDH interface.
Loopbacka l Non-Loopback indicates that the
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
back.
the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback.

OptiX RTN 910
VC4 Loopbackb Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status in the VC-4 path.
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4
the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback
Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

optical interface.

OptiX RTN 910
Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Shutdown Enabled whether the Automatic Laser
Shutdown function is enabled or
disabled for the laser.
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber is
broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the

period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On- 2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
test Period(ms) period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel).
l Select Port from the list box.
Parameters

port.
Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the port.

OptiX RTN 910
Tributary Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Loopback Inloop loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used for
diagnosis and may affect the services that
are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of a

path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load Load Load l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Indication Non-Loaded service loading status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for
the path to mask all the alarms. If a path
carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.

OptiX RTN 910
Retiming Mode Normal Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Retiming Mode of retiming mode of a specific path.
Tributary Clock l By using the retiming function, the
Retiming Mode of retiming reference signal from the SDH
Cross-Connect network and the service data signal are
Clock combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal, the
retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the upstream tributary unit traced.,
the retiming function is used with the
clock of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external clock,
instead of the retiming function, should
be used to provide reference clock signals
for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of services

that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.

OptiX RTN 910


the port name.

the port name.
Enable Port Enabled Enabled This parameter indicates

Disabled the working mode of the
port.
Encapsulation Type Null - l This parameter

802.1Q specifies the method of
the port to process the
QinQ received packets.
l If you set this
parameter to Null, the
port transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set this
parameter to 802.1Q,
the port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1q
standard.
l If you set this
parameter to QinQ, the
port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1ad
QinQ standard.

OptiX RTN 910
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of

10M Half-Duplex different types support
different working
10M Full-Duplex modes.
100M Half-Duplex l When the equipment on
100M Full-Duplex the opposite side works
1000M Full-Duplex in auto-negotiation
mode, set the working
mode of the equipment
on the local side to
Auto-Negotiation.
l When the equipment on
the opposite side works
in full-duplex mode, set
the working mode of
local side to 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l When the equipment on
the opposite side works
in half-duplex mode,
set the working mode
of the equipment on the
local side to 10M Half-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, or Auto-
Negotiation depending
on the port rate of the
equipment on the
opposite side.
l The GE optical
interface supports the
1000M full-duplex
mode only.
Max Frame Length 1518 to 9600 1522 The value of this

(byte) parameter should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.

OptiX RTN 910
Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation 100M Full-Duplex l This parameter

Enable 10M Half-Duplex specifies the auto-
negotiation capability
10M Full-Duplex of the Ethernet port.
100M Half-Duplex l This parameter is valid
100M Full-Duplex only when Working
Mode is set to Auto-
1000M Full-Duplex Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute Optical Port Optical Port l This parameter

Electrical Port specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the EM6F
board supports the
optical port and
electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the attribute of the
physical port.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Flow Control tab.


the port name.

OptiX RTN 910
Non-Autonegotiation Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid

Flow Control Mode Enabled only when Working
Mode is not set to
Auto-Negotiation.
l The non-
autonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the local
side must be consistent
with the non-
autonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
Auto-Negotiation Flow Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid

Control Mode Enable Symmetric Flow only when Working
Control Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l The auto-negotiation
flow control mode of
local side must be
consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.


the port name.

OptiX RTN 910
QinQ Type Domain - - l This parameter

specifies the QinQ type
domain.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as
FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F boardor the
EM4T/EM4F logical
board.

OptiX RTN 910
TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware l This parameter

Access specifies the TAG flag
of a port. For details
Hybrid about the TAG flags
and associated frame-
processing methods,
see Table A-1.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), this
parameter is set to Tag
Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), this
parameter is set to
Access.
l If the accessed services
contain tagged frames
and untagged frames,
Hybrid.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid

only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
situations.

OptiX RTN 910
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid

only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, this
parameter is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the The ports add the The ports add the
frame. VLAN tag, to which VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID Default VLAN ID
and VLAN and VLAN
Priority Priority
correspond, to the correspond, to the
frame and receives frame and receives
the frame. the frame.

OptiX RTN 910
Port Type of Data Processing Method

Frame
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the port
directly transmits
the frame.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.


the port name.
Port Physical - - This parameter indicates

Parameters the physical parameters of
the port.

OptiX RTN 910
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter

Inloop specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are looped
back.
l In normal cases, it is
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter

Inloop specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
Loopback Check - - This parameter specifies

whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Loopback Port - - This parameter specifies

Shutdown whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth - - This parameter specifies

(kbit/s) the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling Broadcast Disabled Disabled This parameter specifies

Packet Suppression Enabled whether to limit the traffic
rate of the broadcast
packets according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in the
total packets. When the
equipment at the opposite
end may encounter a
broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to
Enabled.

OptiX RTN 910
Broadcast Packet 0 to 100 30 When the proportion of

Suppression Threshold the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
30% or higher.
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF port.
Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

customized port name.
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates the working mode
of the Ethernet name.

OptiX RTN 910
Encapsulation Null 802.1Q l This parameter specifies the method of

Type 802.1Q the port to process the received packets.
QinQ l If this parameter is set to Null, the port
transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes


IF port.
QinQ Type - - l This parameter specifies the QinQ type

Domain domain.
l This parameter can be set only when
Encapsulation Type in General
Attributes is set to QinQ.

OptiX RTN 910
Tag Tag Aware Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag of
Access a port. For details about the TAG flags
and associated frame-processing
Hybrid methods, see Table A-2.
l If all the accessed services are frames that
contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),
set this parameter to "Tag Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames that
do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged
frames), set this parameter to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to "Hybrid".
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAG

is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
parameter, see Table A-2.
to the actual situations.
VLAN Priority 0 0 l This parameter is valid only when TAG

1 is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
2
parameter, see Table A-2.
3
l When the VLAN priority is required to
4 divide streams or to be used for other
5 purposes, this parameter needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
6 normal cases, it is recommended that you
7 use the default value.
Table A-2 Data frame processing

Status Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.

OptiX RTN 910
Status Type of Data Processing Method

Frame
Untagged frame The port discards the The port receives The port receives
frame. the frame after the the frame after the
VLAN tag that VLAN tag that
corresponds to corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID" "Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN and "VLAN
Priority" are added Priority" are added
to the frame. to the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then "Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
directly transmits
the frame.
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes


IF port.

OptiX RTN 910
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the

radio link. As the identifier of a radio link,
this parameter is used to prevent incorrect
connections of radio links between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

Link ID of the radio link.
does not match with the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the IF interface.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to locate
the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-
Loopback.
Composite Port Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Loopback Inloop loopback status on the composite
interface.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
Non-Loopback.

OptiX RTN 910
Error Frame Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Discard Enabled Disabled whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
MAC Address - - l This parameter indicates the MAC

address of the port.
parameter.
Transmitting Rate - - l This parameter indicates the transmit rate

(Kbit/s) of the local port.
parameter.
Receiving Rate - - l This parameter indicates the receive rate

(Kbit/s) of the local port.
parameter.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback

Inloop state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
you use the default value.
parameter.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does not
support the setting of this parameter.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).

OptiX RTN 910
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Display in Text Selected Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
Format Deselected text format.
Display in Selected Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the

Hexadecimal Deselected hexadecimal format.

Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei If the NE at the opposite end reports the

([Mode]Content) SBS J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received - [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be

([Mode]Content) received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
default value.


OptiX RTN 910
Navigation Path
1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.


Parameters for the Trace Byte J1


([Mode]Content) SBS LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J1 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
J1 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

([Mode]Content) board does not monitor the received J1
byte.
default value.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

C2 to be Sent - (0x00)Unequipped If the NE at the opposite end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received - (0x00)Unequipped If the NE at the local end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.

OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for Overhead Termination

VC4 Overhead Termination Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-Through,

Termination Pass-Through the NE forwards the original overhead
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
Auto regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
l It is recommended that you use the default
value.

Navigation Path
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.



OptiX RTN 910
Parameters for the Trace Byte


SBS HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J2 byte to be received by
the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

board does not monitor the received J2
byte.
default value.
J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag

Signal Label - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
be Sent parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label - - If the NE at the local end reports the

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
be Received parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
Signal Label - - This parameter displays the V5 byte that is

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) actually received.
Received

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
B Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards

Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1D l Supports the optical The SL1D boards described in

interface inloop this topic include the physical
l Supports the optical SL1D board and the logical
interface outloop SL1D board that the physical
CSTA/CSHC board maps.
l Supports the VC-4 path
inloop
l Supports the VC-4 path
outloop
SP3S and SP3D l Supports the tributary The SP3S and SP3D boards
inloop described in this topic include
l Supports the tributary the physical SP3S and SP3D
outloop boards and the logical SP3S and
SP3D boards that the physical
CSTA, CSHA, CHSB, and
CHSC boards map.
EM4T and EM4F l Supports the Ethernet port The EM4T/EM4F is the logical
EM6T and EM6F inloop at the MAC layer Ethernet board mapping the
l Supports the Ethernet port physical Ethernet board CSHA/
inloop at the PHY layer CSHB/CSHC.
IF1 l Supports the IF port inloop -

l Supports the IF port outloop
l Supports the composite port
inloop
outloop
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1

OptiX RTN 910
B Board Loopback Types IDU Hardware Description
Board Loopback Type Remarks
IFU2 l Supports the IF port inloop -

inloop
outloop
l Supports the MAC inloop at
IFETH ports
IFX2 l Supports the IF port inloop -

inloop
outloop
l Supports the MAC inloop at
IFETH ports
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
C Indicators, Weight, and Power

Consumption of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA


board.

BIOS boot state.

initialized.
fails.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-1

OptiX RTN 910
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards IDU Hardware Description


board.

system.




Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB


board.
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910

BIOS boot state.

initialized.
fails.


board.

system.
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC


board.

OptiX RTN 910

BIOS boot state.

initialized.
fails.


board.

system.



OptiX RTN 910


Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1


normally.

to the board.

service.


configured.

added on the NMS
major alarms.



OptiX RTN 910

an RDI.

system.
activated in the
unprotected system.

system.
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2


normally.

to the board.

service.


configured.

OptiX RTN 910

added on the NMS
major alarms.



an RDI.

system.
activated in the
unprotected system.

system.
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F


l There is no power supplied to the board.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

OptiX RTN 910
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off When the board is being powered on or
for 100 ms repeatedly being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and off When the board is being powered on or
for 300 ms repeatedly being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off for When the board is being powered on or
100 ms repeatedly being reset, the BOOTROM self-check
fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.


Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.

OptiX RTN 910
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D


normally.

to the board.

service.


configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of

the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off The first optical interface of

the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface

of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical interface

of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D


normally.

OptiX RTN 910

to the board.

service.


configured.
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX


board.

board.

system.
Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators

PWRA On (green) The power supply is connected.


OptiX RTN 910
PWRB On (green) The power supply is connected.

Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators

FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
Weight and Power Consumption of Boards
Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards

Boards Weight (kg) Power consumption (W)
CSTA 1.08 kg < 13.6 W
CSHA 1.11 kg < 18.0 W
CSHB 1.16 kg < 22.7 W
CSHC 1.13 kg < 19.6 W
IF1 0.72 kg < 12 W
IFU2 0.79 kg < 23 W
IFX2 0.80 kg < 33 W
EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W
EM6F 0.38 kg < 11.3 W
SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W
SP3S 0.54 kg < 5.7 W
SP3D 0.64 kg < 9.6 W
PIU 0.12 kg < 0.5 W
FAN 0.20 kg < 2.3 W (room temperature)

< 17 W (high temperature)

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description D Glossary
D Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
Number
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/
1.75 in.)
1+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one
protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of
a radio link.
A
Adaptive A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode
modulation based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the
equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the
transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When
the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency
modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
Add/Drop A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal
multiplexer to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
Adjacent A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a
channel horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit
alternate two signals.
polarization
Automatic A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit
transmit power signal detected at the receiver.
control
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-1

OptiX RTN 910
D Glossary IDU Hardware Description
Co-channel A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization

dual wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The co-
polarization channel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single
polarization.
Cross A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)
polarization to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization
interference waves in the CCDP.
cancellation
D
DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-
circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power
supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Digital A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and
modulation frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.
In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Dual-polarized An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent
antenna radio waves orthogonally polarized.
E
Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can
compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency
selective fading.
Bit error A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded
because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,
decided, and regenerated.
F
Forward error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to
correction the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the
bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Frequency A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with
diversity a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal
and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact
of fading.
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
Gateway A network element that is used for communication between the NE

network application layer and the NM application layer.
element
H
Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid
radio supports the AM function.
I
Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements
accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
Management groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent
Protocol multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Intermediate The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal
frequency and an RF signal.
IGMP A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This
snooping protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and
analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between
hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data
on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
L
Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet
switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.
Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data
forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located
on the NE management layer of the transport network.
Link An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to
aggregation form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link
group aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the
input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the
integrality of the transferred signals.
M
Multiplex The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal
section between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a
protection "protection" channel.

OptiX RTN 910
D Glossary IDU Hardware Description
Multiple MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the Rapid
Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendment
Protocol to 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includes
MSTP.
N
N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and
one protection channel.
Network A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software
element running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board
which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software
runs on the system control Unit.
Network The network management system in charge of the operation,
management administration, and maintenance of a network.
system
Non-gateway A network element whose communication with the NM application layer
network must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
element
O
Orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation
engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
Outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements
frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
P
Plesiochronous A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes
Digital the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565
Hierarchy Mbit/s rates.
Polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector
is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the
electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this
electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric
field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,
this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of
the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
D-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It

encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)
into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to
travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer
2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
R
Rapid An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning
Spanning Tree tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward
Protocol compatible with the STP protocol.
S
Single An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagnetic
polarized waves.
antenna
Space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a
specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,
only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology
Protocol of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.
Subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of
network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
Subnetwork A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced
connection by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork
protection connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Synchronous A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and
Digital cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably
Hierarchy adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
U
U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can
support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can
manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a
unified manner.
V
Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network
segments or networks by using the network management software based
on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual
LAN.

OptiX RTN 910
IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.
A
ADC Analog Digit Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ASK Amplitude Shift Keying
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU Administrative Unit
B
BER Bit Error Rate
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BSC Base Station Controller
C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CF Compact Flash card
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-1

OptiX RTN 910
E Acronyms and Abbreviations IDU Hardware Description
CIR Committed Information Rate

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CoS Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CVLAN Customer VLAN
C-VLAN Customer VLAN
D
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communications Channel
DCN Data Communication Network
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
E-LAN Ethernet-LAN
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ES-IS End System to Intermediate System
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Frequency Diversity
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIFO First In First Out
FLP Fast Link Pulse
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910
FTP File Transfer Protocol
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI Graphical User Interface
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3
HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure
HSB Hot Standby
HSM Hitless Switch Mode
I
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU Indoor Unit
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6
IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO International Standard Organization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
IVL Independence VLAN learning
L
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

OptiX RTN 910
LAG Link Aggregation Group

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB LoopBack
LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal
LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code
LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection
LPT Link State Pass Through
M
MA Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MD Maintenance Domain
MDI Medium Dependent Interface
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB Management Information Base
MP Maintenance Point
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
N
NE Network Element
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
NSAP Network Service Access Point

OptiX RTN 910
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance

ODU Outdoor Unit
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Q
QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q
QoS Quality of Service
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
R
RF Radio Frequency
RFC Request For Comment
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RMON Remote Monitoring
RNC Radio Network Controller
RS Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
S
SD Space Diversity

OptiX RTN 910
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SP Strict Priority
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface
STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface
STM-N SDH Transport Module -N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVL Shared VLAN Learning
T
TCI Tag Control Information
TCP Transfer Control Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplex
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TU Tributary Unit
U
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UNI User-Network Interface
V
VC Virtual Container
VC12 Virtual Container -12
VC-12 Virtual Container -12

OptiX RTN 910

VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VLAN Virtual LAN
VoIP Voice over IP
VPN Virtual Private Network
W
WAN Wide Area Network
WRR Weighted Round Robin
WTR Wait to Restore Time
X
XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPIC Cross-polarization Interference Cancellation


1 - Huawei OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 - Huawei OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 910 V100R002C00

iManager U2000 V100R001C00

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

Provides additional information to emphasize

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

3.5.2 Functions and Features Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

- Fixes known bugs.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

D Glossary Adds certain terms.

E Acronyms and Abbreviations Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-66

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-44

xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Table 3-71 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-90

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3

xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

About This Chapter

1.1 Network Application

Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

1.1 Network Application

E1 STM-1/E1 Regional Backhaul E1

OptiX RTN 910 BTS BSC

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910 NodeB BTS RNC BSC

Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.

Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910